Pioneer SC 1525 K User Manual

Operating Instructions  
audio/video multi-channel receiver  
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Product Name: AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER  
Model Number: SC-1525-K  
Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
SERVICE SUPPORT DIVISION  
Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST. LONG BEACH, CA 90810-1003, U.S.A.  
Phone: 1-800-421-1404  
URL: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
D8-10-4*_C1_En  
NOTE:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15  
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,  
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
D8-10-1-2_A1_En  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
Information to User  
THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF  
THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOTTOM.  
RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCLOSED  
Alterations or modifications carried out without  
appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s  
right to operate the equipment.  
D8-10-2_A1_En  
WARRANTY PAGE 115 FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.  
D36-AP9-1_A1_En  
CAUTION  
This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded  
cables and connectors are used to connect the unit  
to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic  
interference with electric appliances such as radios  
and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
for connections.  
D8-10-3a_A1_En  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused  
for a long period of time (for example, when on  
VENTILATION CAUTION  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation  
(at least 20 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 20 cm at each  
side).  
vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product,  
and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire  
hazard, the openings should never be blocked or  
covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths,  
curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet  
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not  
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.  
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect  
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the  
AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make  
sure the unit has been installed so that the power  
cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in  
case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power  
cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet  
when left unused for a long period of time (for  
or a bed.  
D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En  
example, when on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires  
repair will be charged for even during the warranty  
period.  
K041_A1_En  
The Safety of Your Ears is in Your Hands  
Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a  
safe level – a level that lets the sound come through  
clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and, most  
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound, so  
what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and  
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting  
your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing  
adapts.  
ESTABLISH A SAFE LEVEL:  
Set your volume control at a low setting.  
Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, without distortion.  
Once you have established a comfortable sound  
level, set the dial and leave it there.  
BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING  
GUIDELINES:  
Do not turn up the volume so high that you can’t  
hear what’s around you.  
Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in  
potentially hazardous situations.  
Do not use headphones while operating a motorized  
vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic  
hazard and is illegal in many areas.  
S001a_A1_En  
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate  
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.  
Contents  
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the  
front panel input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Connecting an XM Radio tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Connecting a SiriusConnect™ tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Connecting an iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Connecting a USB device for Advanced MCACC  
01 Before you start  
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Checking what’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Operating other Pioneer components with this  
unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Switching components on and off using the  
02 Controls and displays  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
12 volt trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Plugging in the receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
03 Connecting your equipment  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Determining the speakers’ application . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Other speaker connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Some tips for improving sound quality . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Installing your speaker system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Standard surround connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Bi-amping your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Selecting the Speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Front height setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Front wide setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Speaker B setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Bi-Amping setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
ZONE 2 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
About the audio connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting your TV and playback components . . . . . 24  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input . . . . . . . . . 26  
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder  
and other video sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other  
set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . 29  
Connecting other audio components. . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Connecting additional amplifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Connecting AM/FM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Connecting external antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
MULTI-ZONE setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Connecting to the network through LAN interface. . . 33  
Connecting Optional Bluetooth® ADAPTER . . . . . . . 34  
04 Basic Setup  
Changing the OSD display language  
(OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning  
(Full Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 40  
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 41  
05 Basic playback  
Playing a source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Playing a source with HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . 42  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 42  
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod . . . . . . . 43  
Playing a USB device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory  
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory  
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
About playable file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Listening to the radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Using the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Using Neural Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Saving station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Naming station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Listening to Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Listening to XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Using XM HD Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Saving channel presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Saving channel presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Listening to Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Programming the Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . 50  
5
En  
Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of  
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Wireless music play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth  
wireless technology device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth  
09 Controlling the rest of your system  
About the Remote Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Operating multiple receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Setting the remote to control other components . . . . 68  
Selecting preset codes directly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Programming signals from other remote controls . . . 68  
Erasing one of the remote control button settings . . . 69  
Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input  
wireless technology device with your system . . . . . . 52  
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Direct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Setting the backlight mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Multi operation and System off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Programming a Multi operation or a shutdown  
sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Using multi operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Erasing the settings for the multi-operation . . . . . . . 71  
Resetting the remote control settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Controlling components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
06 Listening to your system  
Auto playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Listening in surround sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Using Stream Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Choosing the input signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Better sound using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
10 The Advanced MCACC menu  
07 Control with HDMI function  
Making receiver settings from the Advanced  
Making Control with HDMI connections. . . . . . . . . . . 57  
HDMI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
About synchronized operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
About connections with a product of a different brand  
that supports the Control with HDMI function . . . . . 59  
Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Cautions on the Control with HDMI function . . . . . . . 59  
MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Fine Channel Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Standing Wave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Speaker Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Standing Wave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Acoustic Cal EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Output MCACC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Clearing MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
08 Using other functions  
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Switching the speaker terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Making an audio or a video recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Switching the HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Using the Web Control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
6
En  
11 The System Setup and Other Setup menus  
Making receiver settings from the System Setup  
menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Speaker system setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
THX Audio Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Network Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
IP address/Proxy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Checking the MAC address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Network Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
The Other Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Volume Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
EXTENSION Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
12 Additional information  
Speaker Setting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Positional relationship between speakers and  
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
ADAPTER PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . . 96  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Web Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Important information regarding the HDMI  
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Internet radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
XM radio messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
SIRIUS radio messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . 103  
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
About iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
About SIRIUS and XM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with  
different input signal formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
7
En  
Flow of settings on the receiver  
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily  
after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.  
The colors of the steps indicate the following:  
Required setting item  
Setting to be made as necessary  
MCACC speaker settings  
• Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning  
(Full Auto MCACC) (page 38)  
1
2
Before you start  
• Checking what’s in the box (page 10)  
• Loading the batteries (page 10)  
7
8
9
Determining the speakers’ application (page  
17)  
The Input Setup menu (page 40)  
• 7.1 channel surround system (Front height)  
• 7.1 channel surround system (Front wide)  
• 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B  
connection  
• 5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping  
connection (High quality surround)  
(When using connections other than the  
recommended connections)  
Basic playback (page 42)  
• 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection  
(Multi Zone)  
10 Switching the HDMI output (page 65)  
11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired  
• Using the various listening modes (page 53)  
• Better sound using Phase Control (page 56)  
• Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH  
ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 75)  
• Changing the channel level while listening (Tip on  
page 86)  
• Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ,  
Sound retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page 60)  
• Setting the PQLS function (page 59)  
• Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness or  
Sound delay, etc.) (page 60)  
• Setting the Video options (page 62)  
3
4
Connecting the speakers  
• Placing the speakers (page 18)  
• Connecting the speakers (page 19)  
• Installing your speaker system (page 20)  
• Bi-amping your speakers (page 21)  
Connecting the components  
• About the audio connection (page 22)  
• About the video converter (page 22)  
• Connecting your TV and playback components  
(page 24)  
• Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 31)  
• Plugging in the receiver (page 37)  
12 Other optional adjustments and settings  
• Control with HDMI function (page 57)  
• The Advanced MCACC menu (page 75)  
• The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page  
84)  
5
6
Power On  
Changing the OSD display language (OSD  
Language) (page 38)  
13 Making maximum use of the remote control  
• Operating multiple receivers (page 67)  
• Setting the remote to control other components  
(page 68)  
8
En  
Before you start  
01  
Chapter 1:  
Before you start  
PQLS1  
Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting  
a PQLS-compatible player with HDMI connections.  
Our philosophy  
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater  
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of  
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they  
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing  
on three important steps:  
Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible  
Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right  
speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the  
previous horizontally-oriented sound field. The height  
channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of three-  
dimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.  
1
Achieving the highest possible sound quality  
2
Allowing for customized acoustic calibration  
Internet Radio  
according to any listening area  
By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN  
terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations.  
3
Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-  
class studio engineers*  
XM and SIRIUS Ready  
* With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has  
been designated AIR Studios Monitor:  
With the XM and SIRIUS Radio terminals, you’ll be up  
and running in no time.  
Bluetooth compatible  
Using the Bluetooth ADAPTER (Pioneer Model No. AS-  
2
BT100) lets you enjoy music files on an iPhone or other  
Bluetooth wireless technology device wirelessly.  
Sound Retriever and Sound Retriever Air  
The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to  
restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left  
over after compression. Sound Retriever Air  
compensates for reduced sound quality due to  
compression when sending Bluetooth signals.  
Features  
Direct Energy HD Amplifier  
Through a collaboration, Pioneer and ICEpower have  
jointly development a unique class D amplifier called a  
“Direct Energy HD (High Fidelity Class D) amplifier”. This  
new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding  
performance with high sound quality and reproduces the  
latest in multi-channel digital contents.  
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC  
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate  
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced  
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.  
Web control  
HDMI (Ver.1.4a with 3D, Audio Return Channel)  
The receiver can be operated using a browser from a  
computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver.  
A compatible component is required to use the above  
function.  
RF two-way communications function  
3
Remote operation on an iPhone/iPod touch  
Using the CU-RF100 , the information shown of the  
receiver’s display can be displayed on the remote control  
in your hands and you can operate the remote control  
without worrying about obstacles or the direction in  
which the remote control is pointing.  
Operation via LAN is possible from an iPhone or iPod  
touch by downloading a Pioneer original application  
(iControlAV) from the iTunes Store.  
iPhone/iPod playback  
Your iPhone or iPod can be connected to the receiver’s  
USB terminal to play the music/video files on the iPhone/  
iPod.  
Note  
1 The PQLS functions supported for the PQLS Multi Surround and PQLS 2ch Audio.  
2 The AS-BT100 is sold separately.  
3 The CU-RF100 is sold separately.  
9
En  
Before you start  
01  
• Never use new and old batteries together.  
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries  
properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
Checking what’s in the box  
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied  
accessories:  
• Batteries with the same shape may have different  
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
• Remote control unit  
• AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm system  
operation) x2  
• AM loop antenna  
• FM wire antenna  
• iPod cable  
WARNING  
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
• Power cord  
• These operating instructions  
Installing the receiver  
Operating range of remote control unit  
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a  
The remote control may not work properly if:  
level and stable surface.  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and  
the receiver’s remote sensor.  
Don’t install it on the following places:  
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)  
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off  
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.  
– in direct sunlight  
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting  
infrared rays.  
– in damp or wet areas  
– in extremely hot or cold areas  
– in places where there is vibration or other movement  
– in places that are very dusty  
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another  
infrared remote control unit.  
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)  
• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the  
power is on or just after it is turned off. The bottom  
panel becomes hot when the power is on (or right  
after it is turned off) and could cause burns.  
30°  
30°  
Loading the batteries  
7 m (23 ft.)  
The batteries included with the unit are to check initial  
operations; they may not last over a long period.  
We recommend using alkaline batteries that have a  
longer life.  
Tip  
• By connecting an RF adapter to the RS-232C and  
EXTENSION terminals, the CU-RF100 omni-  
directional remote control can be used for RF two-  
1
way communications with the receiver. With RF two-  
way communications, the information of the  
receiver’s display can be displayed on the remote  
control in your hands and the remote control can be  
operated without worrying about obstacles or the  
CAUTION  
2
direction in which the remote control is pointing.  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as  
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:  
Note  
1 The RF adapter and CU-RF100 omni-directional remote control are sold separately.  
2 The maximum line-of-sight distance for RF two-way communications is about 10 meters. This line-of-sight communications distance is a rough  
indication, and may differ according to the surrounding environment.  
10  
En  
Controls and displays  
02  
Chapter 2:  
Controls and displays  
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according  
to component control using the following system:  
Remote control  
White – Receiver control, TV control  
This section explains how to operate the remote control  
for the receiver.  
Blue – Other controls (See page 43, 44, 46, 47, 51 and  
72.)  
10  
1
RECEIVER  
MULTI  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
OPERATION  
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.  
1
2
R.SETUP  
2
MULTI OPERATION – Use to perform multi  
operations (page 70).  
R.SETUP – Use to input the preset code when making  
remote control settings and to set the remote control  
mode (page 67).  
BD  
TV  
DVD DVR/BDR HDMI  
CD NET RADIO ADAPTER  
3
iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS  
INPUT SELECT TV CTRL  
XM  
RECEIVER  
3
Input function buttons  
11  
Press to select control of other components (page 67).  
4
5
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function (page 42).  
TV CONTROL  
12  
13  
4
TV CTRL  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer when  
controlling the TV (page 68).  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
5
TV CONTROL buttons  
LIST TUNE TOOLS  
6
7
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to  
the TV CTRL button.  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
6
Receiver setting buttons  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
Press first to access:  
RECEIVER  
HOME  
TUNE  
MENU  
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio  
options (page 60).  
iPod CTRL  
AUTO /ALC  
/
PGM MEMORY MENU  
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
options (page 62).  
TV  
/
DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu  
(pages 38, 40, 57, 75, 84 and 87).  
8
9
HDMI OUT  
2
AUDIO  
1
3
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current  
menu screen.  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP  
INFO  
DISP  
4
5
6
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER  
7
////ENTER  
7
8
9
CH  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 75) and the Audio or Video  
options (page 60 or 62).  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/
CLR  
0
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
LIGHT  
14  
8
Receiver Control buttons  
Press first to access:  
RECEIVER  
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT Switches between Auto  
Surround (page 53), Auto Level Control mode and  
Stream Direct mode (page 55).  
RECEIVER  
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and  
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 55).  
11  
En  
Controls and displays  
02  
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to  
switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, etc.)  
(page 53).  
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 65).  
9
MULTI-ZONE select buttons  
Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 and ZONE 3  
(page 64).  
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various  
surround modes (page 54).  
10 Remote control LED  
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.  
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode  
(page 54).  
RECEIVER  
11  
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control  
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to  
select the white commands).  
(page 56).  
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings  
(page 65).  
Switch to perform operations in the main zone.  
Also use this button to set up surround sound.  
PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting (page 59).  
HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal  
(page 65).  
12 MASTER VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 56).  
13 MUTE  
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets  
(page 56).  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and  
select the amount of time before sleep (page 65).  
14  
Press to turn on/off the illumination for the buttons. The  
way the buttons light can be selected from four modes  
(page 70).  
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,  
then use / to adjust the level (page 86).  
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog  
input signal to prevent distortion (page 64).  
Display  
6
1
2
3
4
5
7 8  
9
10  
11  
12 13  
2
DIGITAL PLUS  
DSD PCM  
TUNED  
AUTO  
PCM  
HDMI  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
L
C
R
2
TrueHD WMA9Pro MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO  
SL  
SR  
DTS HD ES 96/24  
MONO  
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER  
dB  
XL XC XR  
TV  
DVD  
BD DVR  
SIRIUS  
iPod  
CD TUNER  
CD-R PHONO  
VIDEO  
HDMI [ 2 ]  
USB XM  
[ 3 ]  
MSTR  
LFE  
[ 4 ]  
AUTO SURROUND  
STREAM DIRECT  
2
PROLOGIC  
x
Neo:6  
THX ADV.SURROUND  
STEREO STANDARD  
SP AB  
SLEEP  
6
14  
15 16 17  
18  
19  
1
SIGNAL indicators  
3
Digital format indicators  
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.  
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input  
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format  
is detected.  
signal automatically (page 56).  
2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital decoding.  
2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital Plus  
decoding.  
2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.  
DTS – Lights with DTS decoding.  
2
Program format indicators  
Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are  
being input.  
L/R – Left front/Right front channel  
DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.  
96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.  
WMA9 Pro – Lights to indicate that a WMA9 Pro  
signal is being decoded.  
DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital)  
to PCM conversion with SACDs.  
C – Center channel  
SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel  
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light  
when an LFE signal is being input)  
XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above  
XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono  
surround channel or matrix encode flag  
12  
En  
Controls and displays  
02  
PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.  
MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master  
Audio signals.  
14 Speaker indicators  
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B  
(page 63).  
15 SLEEP  
4
MULTI-ZONE  
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 65).  
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 63).  
16 Matrix decoding format indicators  
5
SOUND  
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro  
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 53).  
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone  
controls features is selected (page 60).  
Neo:6 When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver  
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 53)  
Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.  
.
6
Listening mode indicators  
17 S.RTRV  
AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround  
feature is switched on (page 53).  
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is active  
(page 60)  
.
ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode  
is selected (page 55).  
18 Character display  
Displays various system information.  
STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is  
selected (page 55).  
19 Remote control mode indicator  
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode  
setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (page 67)  
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the  
Advanced Surround modes has been selected  
(page 54).  
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched  
on (page 55).  
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard  
Surround modes is switched on (page 53).  
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is  
selected (page 54).  
7
(PHASE CONTROL)  
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 56).  
8
Analog signal indicators  
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal  
(page 64).  
9
Tuner indicators  
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.  
STEREO Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being  
received in auto stereo mode.  
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using  
MPX.  
10  
Lights when the sound is muted (page 12).  
11 Master volume level  
Shows the overall volume level.  
---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates  
the maximum level.  
12 Input function indicators  
Light to indicate the input function you have selected.  
13 Scroll indicators  
Light when there are more selectable items when making  
the various settings.  
13  
En  
Controls and displays  
Front panel  
02  
1
2
3 4  
5
6
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
iPod  
iPhone  
PQLS  
HDMI  
STANDBY/ON  
8
9 10 11 12  
13  
14  
15  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
MULTI-ZONE  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
7
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI 5  
VIDEO CAMERA  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
16  
STANDBY/ON  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
1
7
Front panel controls  
Switches the receiver between on and standby.  
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the  
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.  
2
INPUT SELECTOR dial  
Use to select an input function.  
3
Indicators  
ADVANCED MCACC  
Lights when EQ is set to ON in  
the AUDIO PARAMETER menu (page 60)  
.
PQLS – Lights when the PQLS feature is active  
(page 59).  
HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-equipped  
component; lights when the component is connected  
8
AUDIO PARAMETER  
(page 24)  
.
Use to access the Audio options (page 60).  
iPod/iPhone – Lights to indicate iPod/iPhone is  
connected (page 35).  
9
VIDEO PARAMETER  
Use to access the Video options (page 62).  
4
Remote sensor  
Receives the signals from the remote control (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 10).  
10 /// TUNE PRESET) /ENTER  
(
/
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your Home  
Menu. Use TUNE / to find radio frequencies and use  
PRESET / to find preset stations (page 46).  
5
Character display  
See Display on page 12.  
6
MASTER VOLUME dial  
14  
En  
Controls and displays  
02  
11 TUNER EDIT  
Use with ////ENTER to memorize and name  
stations for recall (page 46).  
12 BAND  
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 46).  
13 Listening mode buttons  
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT Switches  
between Auto Surround (page 53), Auto Level Control  
mode and Stream Direct mode (page 55)  
.
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening  
mode (page 54).  
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard  
decoding and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic,  
Neo:6, etc.) (page 53).  
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between  
the various surround modes (page 54).  
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and  
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 55).  
14 MULTI-ZONE controls  
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-  
ZONE setup on page 32) use these controls to control the  
sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE  
controls on page 63).  
15 SPEAKERS  
Use to change the speaker terminal (page 63).  
16 HOME MENU  
Press to access the Home Menu (pages 38, 40, 57, 75, 84  
and 87).  
17 RETURN  
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.  
18 HDMI input connector  
Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device (Video  
camera, etc.) (page 34).  
19 iPod/iPhone/USB terminals  
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio and video  
source, or connect a USB device for audio and photo  
playback (page 35).  
20 MCACC SETUP MIC jack  
Use to connect the supplied microphone (page 38).  
21 PHONES jack  
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are  
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.  
15  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
CChaoptnern3:ecting your equipment  
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter explains  
the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.  
Rear panel  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
AC IN  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
OUTPUT 5 V  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
HDMI  
(
ASSIGNABLE  
)
100 mA MAX  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
ASSIGNABLE  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN IN  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
1
2
IN  
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
OUT  
(
)
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK  
L
(
)
OUT  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
R
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
Y
PB  
PR  
GND  
ANTENNA  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
B
A
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT 5 V  
2
)
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
EXTENSION  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
• The CU-RF100 omni-directional remote control  
(separately sold) can be connected to the RS-232C  
and EXTENSION terminals. Using the CU-RF100 lets  
you display the receiver’s display information on the  
remote control display in your hands and operate it  
without worrying about obstacles or the direction in  
which the remote control is pointing.  
Note  
• The input functions below are assigned by default to  
the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The  
Input Setup menu on page 40 to change the  
assignments if other connections are used.  
Input Terminals  
Input function  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
IN 1  
DVD  
COAX-1  
BD  
(BD)  
RS-232C  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
HDMI 3  
OPT-1  
OPT-2  
OPT-3  
(
OUTPUT 5 V  
)
150 mA MAX  
IN 2  
IN 3  
EXTENSION  
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
(HDMI-3)  
(HDMI-4)  
(HDMI-5)  
CAUTION  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.  
HDMI 4  
HDMI 5  
(front panel)  
CD  
COAX-2  
CD-R/TAPE  
16  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
This surround system produces a true-to-life sound over  
a wider area.  
Determining the speakers’ application  
This unit permits you to build various surround systems,  
in accordance with the number of speakers you have.  
[C] 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B  
connection  
Speaker System setting: Speaker B  
• Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right  
channels (L and R).  
• It is also possible to only connect one of the surround  
back speakers (SB) or neither.  
Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below.  
R
[A] 7.1 channel surround system (Front height)  
L
*Default setting  
R
C
L
SR  
Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH)  
SW  
FHR  
SBR  
FHL  
SL  
Speaker B  
SBL  
R
L
C
SR  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same  
connections also allow for 7.1-channel surround sound  
in the main zone when not using the B speakers.  
SW  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
[D] 5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-  
amping connection (High quality surround)  
Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp  
A 7.1 ch surround system connects the left and right  
front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and  
right front height speakers (FHL/FHR), the left and right  
surround speakers (SL/SR), the left and right surround  
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high  
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.  
1
back speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofer (SW).  
Front Bi-Amp  
This surround system produces a more true-to-life sound  
from above.  
R
[B] 7.1 channel surround system (Front wide)  
Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW)  
L
C
SW  
R
SR  
FWR  
L
SL  
C
SR  
SW  
FWL  
SL  
SBR  
SBL  
This plan replaces the left and right front height speakers  
shown in [A] with the left and right front wide speakers  
1
(FWL/FWR).  
Note  
1 It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height or front wide speakers and the surround back speakers.  
17  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
[E] 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2  
connection (Multi Zone)  
Speaker System setting: ZONE 2  
Placing the speakers  
Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The  
selection of input devices is limited.)  
you intend to connect.  
SW  
FHL  
L
FHR  
R
C
30 30  
Main zone  
FWL  
SL  
FWR  
SR  
R
60  
120  
60  
120  
L
C
SW  
60  
SBL  
SB  
SBR  
SR  
Sub zone  
SL  
• Place the surround speakers at 120º from the center.  
If you, (1) use the surround back speaker, and, (2)  
don’t use the front height speakers / front wide  
speakers, we recommend placing the surround  
speaker right beside you.  
R
L
ZONE 2  
• If you intend to connect only one surround back  
speaker, place it directly behind you.  
• Place the left and right front height speakers at least  
one meter (3.3 ft.) directly above the left and right  
front speakers.  
Important  
• The Speaker System setting must be made if you  
use any of the connections shown above other than  
[A] (see Speaker system setting on page 85).  
THX speaker system setup  
If you are using a THX certified subwoofer, use the THX  
INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer has one)  
or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.  
• Sound does not come through simultaneously from  
the front height, front wide, speaker B and surround  
back speakers. Output speakers are different  
See also THX Audio Setting on page 87 to make the  
settings that will give you the best sound experience  
when using the Home THX modes (page 54).  
depending on the input signal or listening mode.  
Other speaker connections  
Some tips for improving sound quality  
• Your favorite speaker connections can be selected  
even if you have fewer than 5.1 speakers (except front  
left/right speakers).  
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect  
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines  
should help you to get the best sound from your system.  
• When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers  
with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the  
front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency  
component is played from the front speakers, so the  
speakers could be damaged.)  
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the  
other speakers should be at about ear-level when  
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the  
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very  
high on a wall is not recommended.  
After connecting, be sure to conduct the Full Auto  
MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure.  
See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning  
(Full Auto MCACC) on page 38.  
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2  
m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from  
the TV.  
• If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV,  
use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a  
sufficient distance from your CRT TV.  
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front  
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a  
narrower angle.  
18  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so  
that the sound of the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker  
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of  
the front left and right speakers.  
Connecting the speakers  
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a  
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to  
match these up with the terminals on the speakers  
themselves.  
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening  
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.  
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.  
CAUTION  
• Surround and surround back speakers should be  
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than  
your ears and tilted slightly downward. Make sure the  
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the  
speakers should be more directly behind the listener  
than for home theater playback.  
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE  
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,  
disconnect the power cord before touching any  
uninsulated parts.  
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted  
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.  
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel  
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.  
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away  
from the listening position than the front and center  
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound  
effect.  
Bare wire connections  
1
2
3
Twist exposed wire strands together. (fig. A)  
Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire. (fig. B)  
Tighten terminal. (fig. C)  
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
3
10 mm ( / in.)  
8
Banana plug connections  
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana  
plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug  
the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.  
Important  
• Please refer to the manual that came with your  
speakers for details on how to connect the other end  
of the speaker cables to your speakers.  
• Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not  
possible to connect using speaker cables.  
CAUTION  
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.  
This not only improves sound quality, but also  
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from  
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of  
external shocks such as earthquakes.  
19  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
Installing your speaker system  
03  
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always  
be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the  
left surround back terminal).  
Standard surround connection  
The front height terminals can also be used  
for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.  
Front height setting  
Front height right  
Front height left  
Front wide left  
Speaker B - left  
Front wide setting  
Front wide right  
Speaker B setting  
Speaker B - right  
Front right  
Front left  
Subwoofer  
Center  
LINE LEVEL  
INPUT  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
AC IN  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
(OUTPUT  
100 mA MAX  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
HDMI  
5
V
)
ASSIGNABLE  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
1
2
IN  
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
OUT  
(
)
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
FRCENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK  
L
(
)
OUT  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
R
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
Y
PB  
PR  
GND  
ANTENNA  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
A
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
EXTENSION  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
The surround back terminals can also be  
used for ZONE 2.  
5.1 ch surround setting  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Surround back  
Surround back left  
ZONE 2 - Left  
6.1 ch surround setting  
Surround right  
Surround left  
7.1 ch surround setting  
Surround back right  
ZONE 2 setting  
ZONE 2 - Right  
20  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Bi-amping your speakers  
Front right  
Front left  
High  
Bi-amp compatible  
Bi-amp compatible  
speaker  
speaker  
High  
Center  
Low  
Low  
Subwoofer  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
AC IN  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
HDMI  
(OUTPUT  
5
V
ASSIGNABLE  
)
100 mA MAX  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
ASSIGNABLE  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
OUT  
(
)
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
FROCENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK  
(
)
OUT  
VIDEO  
L
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
R
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
Y
PB  
PR  
GND  
ANTENNA  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
A
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
EXTENSION  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
Surround right  
Surround left  
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver  
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different  
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your  
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate  
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement  
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.  
Bi-wiring your speakers  
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-  
amping.  
• With these connections, the Speaker System setting  
makes no difference.  
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to  
the speaker terminal on the receiver.  
Using a banana plug for the second connection is  
recommended.  
CAUTION  
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals  
have two metal plates that connect the High to the  
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are  
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely  
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for  
more information.  
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,  
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing  
so may damage your speakers.  
CAUTION  
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same  
terminal in this way.  
• When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-  
amping shown at the left.  
21  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
Selecting the Speaker system  
03  
ZONE 2 setup  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback on another component in ZONE 2.  
The front height terminals can be used for front wide and  
Speaker B connections, in addition to for the front height  
speakers. Also, the surround back terminals can be used  
for bi-amping and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for  
the surround back speakers. Make this setting according  
to the application.  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back  
speaker terminals.  
See Standard surround connection on page 20.  
2
Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Speaker System menu.  
Front height setup  
*Default setting  
See Speaker system setting on page 85 to do this.  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front height  
About the audio connection  
speaker terminals.  
See Standard surround connection on page 20.  
Types of cables and  
terminals  
Transferable audio  
signals  
2
If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’ from the  
Speaker System menu.  
See Speaker system setting on page 85 to do this.  
HDMI  
HD audio  
Front wide setup  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front height  
speaker terminals.  
See Standard surround connection on page 20.  
Digital (Coaxial)  
Conventional digital audio  
Conventional analog audio  
2
Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the Speaker System  
Digital (Optical)  
menu.  
See Speaker system setting on page 85 to do this.  
Speaker B setup  
You can listen to stereo playback in another room.  
RCA (Analog)  
(White/Red)  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front height  
speaker terminals.  
See Standard surround connection on page 20.  
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Speaker System menu.  
See Speaker system setting on page 85 to do this.  
• With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be  
transferred in high quality over a single cable.  
Bi-Amping setup  
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high  
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.  
About the video converter  
1
Connect bi-amp compatible speakers to the front  
The video converter ensures that all video sources are  
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.  
The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot  
be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to  
the receiver’s HDMI video outputs when connecting this  
and surround back speaker terminals.  
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 21.  
2
Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System  
menu.  
1
video source.  
See Speaker system setting on page 85 to do this.  
Note  
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some  
components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in  
Setting the Video options on page 62) OFF.  
• The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and  
1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.  
• Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite MONITOR OUT  
terminals.  
22  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
If several video components are assigned to the same  
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 40),  
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then  
composite (in that order).  
1
About HDMI  
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital  
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.  
Terminal for connection  
Terminal for connection  
with TV monitor  
with source device  
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia  
®
Interface (HDMI ) technology.  
This receiver supports the functions described below  
through HDMI connections.  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
2
• Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents  
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))  
Y
P
B
P
R
Y
PB  
PR  
3
• 3D signal transfer  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
3
• Deep Color signal transfer  
3
• x.v.Color signal transfer  
3
• Audio Return Channel  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO IN  
• Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio  
Video signals can be output  
signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels  
4
• Input of the following digital audio formats:  
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends  
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the  
Video options on page 62) OFF.  
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate  
audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-  
HD High Resolution Audio), DVD-Audio, CD, SACD  
(DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by  
Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi  
• Synchronized operation with components using the  
Control with HDMI function (see Control with HDMI  
function on page 57)  
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.  
“x.v.Color” and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
Note  
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content  
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection,  
however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.  
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some  
components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video  
this is not a malfunction.  
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.  
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however,  
make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.  
®
®
2 • Use a High Speed HDMI cable. If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI cable is used, it may not work properly.  
• When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is connected, it may not operate properly.  
3 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.  
4 • HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when  
switching between audio formats or beginning playback.  
• Turning on/off the device connected to this unit's HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during  
playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.  
23  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your TV and playback components  
Connecting using HDMI  
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it to  
this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.  
If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI  
functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 57).  
HDMI/DVI-compatible  
Blu-ray disc player  
Other HDMI/DVI-  
equipped component  
HDMI/DVI-compatible  
monitor  
Select one  
DIGITAL OUT  
HDMI OUT  
HDMI OUT  
HDMI IN  
AUDIO OUT  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
This connection is  
required in order to  
listen to the sound of  
the TV over the  
1
receiver.  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
HDMI  
(OUTPUT  
5
V
ASSIGNABLE  
)
100 mA MAX  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
TICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
I
ASSIGNA
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
TV/SAT  
VIDEO  
(
)
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CEN  
(
)
OUT  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBW  
SIGNAL  
Y
PB  
PR  
GND  
ANTENNA  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
EXTENSION  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
• When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible  
monitor using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal, switch the  
HDMI output setting to HDMI OUT 2 or HDMI OUT  
ALL. See Switching the HDMI output on page 65.  
• For input components, connections other than HDMI  
connections are also possible (see Connecting your  
DVD player with no HDMI output on page 25).  
• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the  
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio  
1
cables.  
Note  
1 When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI Audio Return Channel function, the sound of the  
TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI  
Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 57).  
24  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output  
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no  
HDMI output) to the receiver.  
DVD player, etc.  
HDMI/DVI-compatible  
monitor  
Select one  
Select one  
HDMI IN  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
PR  
PB  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
Y
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
(OUTPUT  
100 mA MAX  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
HDMI  
5
V
)
ASSIGNABLE  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
ASSIGNA
PTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
2
I
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
OUT  
)
R/BDR  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER  
S
)
EO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
Y
PB  
PR  
GND  
ANTENNA  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
EXTENSION  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the  
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio  
1
cables (page 24).  
• If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to  
tell the receiver which digital input you connected the  
player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
Note  
1 When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI Audio Return Channel function, the sound of the  
TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI  
Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 57).  
25  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input  
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the  
receiver.  
• With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cable.  
Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite or component cord.  
DVD player, etc.  
TV  
Select one  
Select one  
Select one  
VIDEO IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
PR  
PB  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
PR  
PB  
R
L
Y
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
Y
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
(
)
CONTROL  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
(OUTPUT  
4
5
V
)
100 mA MAX  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
PTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
ASSIGN
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
(
DVR/B
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER  
S
(
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZOUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
GND  
NTEN
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
EXTENSION  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
• Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio  
on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to input  
video signals.  
Depending on the video component, it may not be  
possible to output signals connected by HDMI and  
other methods simultaneously, and it may be  
necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with your component  
for more information.  
• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the  
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio  
cables (page 24).  
• If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to  
tell the receiver which digital input you connected the  
player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
26  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources  
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices,  
including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The  
Input Setup menu on page 40).  
HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.  
Select one  
DIGITAL OUT  
VIDEO IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
R
L
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
(OUTPUT  
100 mA MAX  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
HDMI  
2
5
V
)
ASSIGNABLE  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
TICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
ASSIGNA
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
OUT  
(
)
DVR/BDR  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER  
S
(
)
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
Y
PB  
PR  
GND  
ANTENNA  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
EXTENSION  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
• In order to record, you must connect the analog  
audio cables (the digital connection is for playback  
only) (page 64).  
• If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is  
equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we  
recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI IN  
terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver  
and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on  
page 24).  
27  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box  
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input  
Setup menu on page 40).  
STB  
Select one  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
)
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
(OUTPUT  
100 mA MAX  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
CONTROL  
HDMI  
5
V
)
ASSIGNABLE  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
ASSIGNA
TICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
TV/SAT  
D
IDEO  
OUT  
(
)
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER SU  
(
)
OUT  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
Y
PB  
PR  
GND  
ANTENNA  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
EXTENSION  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
• If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output  
terminal, we recommend connecting it to the  
receiver’s HDMI IN terminal. When doing so, also  
connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see  
Connecting using HDMI on page 24).  
28  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs  
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending on  
whether your player supports surround back channels). Make sure that the player is set to output multichannel analog  
audio.  
DVD player, etc.  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
SUBWOOFER  
OUTPUT  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
CENTER  
OUTPUT  
SURROUND  
OUTPUT  
R
SURROUND BACK  
OUTPUT  
R
L
L
R
L
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
LAN 10/100  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
(
OUTPUT 5 V  
)
100 mA MAX  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
1
2
IN  
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK  
L
R
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
GND  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
B
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
L
R
L
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
IR  
12V  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
1
2
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
2
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to  
the SURROUND BACK L jack on this receiver.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround  
speakers for the surround channel, not the surround  
back channel.  
• The audio signal input to MULTI CH IN cannot be  
downmixed.  
29  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting other audio components  
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The  
Input Setup menu on page 40).  
Turntable  
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.  
Select one  
Select one  
DIGITAL IN  
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO IN  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
L
ANALOG  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
OPTICAL  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
(
)
XM  
ADAPTER PORT  
LAN 10/100  
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
100 mA MAX  
SIS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABL
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
2
IN  
1
IN  
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/F
(Single)  
RONT CENTER SURROUND  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
SIGNAL  
GND  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SUND BACK  
SURROUND  
R
L
L
(Single)  
R
L
R
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
12V  
TRIGGER  
1
2
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
150 mA MAX)  
CAUTION:  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
• If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog  
audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the  
recorder.  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder  
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9  
1
Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to  
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using HDMI, coaxial  
or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9  
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected DVD  
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro  
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital  
output.  
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s  
digital out jack.  
Turntables only:  
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the  
ground terminal on this receiver.  
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a  
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs  
instead.  
Note  
1 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be  
downsampled to 48 kHz.  
30  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting additional amplifiers  
Connecting AM/FM antennas  
This receiver has more than enough power for any home  
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every  
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the  
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power  
your speakers.  
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna  
as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,  
connect external antennas (see Connecting external  
antennas on page 32).  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
1
2
L
Front channel  
amplifier  
R
ANALOG  
INPUT  
3
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
Center channel  
amplifier (mono)  
5
ANALOG  
INPUT  
FM UNBAL 75  
4
L
Surround  
channel amplifier  
R
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
/100  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
fig. a  
fig. b  
fig. c  
100 mA MAX  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
ASE  
SIGNABLE  
AL  
TIC
IN  
N  
1
2
IN  
3
OUT  
(
)
(
)
CD  
D-
SAT  
BDR  
VIDEO  
L
Front height or  
Front wide  
channel amplifier  
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENT  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWO  
L
SURROUND BACK  
SURROUND  
1
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna  
L
(Single)  
R
R
wires.  
Surround back  
channel amplifier  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
2
Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into  
each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM  
antenna wires.  
TION:  
R
IMPEDANCE  
6
Ω - 16 Ω .  
NTION:  
E
D'IMPEDANCE DE Ω - 16 Ω .  
6
Powered  
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.  
subwoofer  
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction  
indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the  
stand (fig. b).  
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround  
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In  
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))  
terminal only.  
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other  
surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before  
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the  
reception is clear.  
• The sound from the surround back terminals will  
depend on how you have configured the Speaker  
system setting on page 85.  
4
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a  
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the  
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any  
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.  
direction giving the best reception.  
5
Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna  
socket.  
If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker  
setting (see Speaker Setting on page 85) to LARGE.  
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a  
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.  
31  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting external antennas  
To improve FM reception, connect an external FM  
antenna to FM UNBAL 75 Ω.  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections  
It is possible to make these connections if you have a  
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub  
zone, and a separate TV and a separate amplifier (and  
speakers) for your secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will  
also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the  
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on  
page 33 for your primary sub zone. There are two primary  
sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose  
whichever works best for you.  
75 Ω coaxial cable  
ANTENNA  
MULTI-ZONE listening options  
The following table shows the signals that can be output  
1
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 :  
Sub Zone  
ZONE 2  
Input functions available  
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to 20  
ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals  
without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.  
DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO, INTERNET  
RADIO, iPod/USB, XM RADIO, CD, CD-R/TAPE,  
TUNER, ADAPTER PORT, SIRIUS  
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally  
outdoors.  
(Outputs analog audio, composite video and  
component video.)  
Outdoor antenna  
ZONE 3  
Same as ZONE 2 above.  
(Outputs analog audio and composite video.)  
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)  
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
ANTENNA  
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT2  
jack, both on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.  
5 m to 6 m  
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
Sub zone (ZONE 2)  
Main zone  
MULTI-ZONE setup  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
This receiver can power up to three independent systems  
in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-  
ZONE connections.  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDE
ASSIGNABLE  
VIDEO IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
(
)
DVR/BDR  
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the  
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source  
can also be used. The main and sub zones have  
independent power (the main zone power can be off while  
one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones  
can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls.  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
D
(
)
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE OUT  
2
Y
PB  
PR  
ANTENNA  
AUDIO IN  
R
L
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
CONTROL  
IR  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
OUT  
EXTENSION  
Note  
1 For the INTERNET RADIO, XM RADIO, SIRIUS and iPod/USB inputs, it is not possible use the same input in ZONE 2 and ZONE 3  
simultaneously.  
2 • COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images.  
• The GUI screen is not displayed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected.  
• The video convert function does not work for ZONE 2. Connect the composite video and component video to the same types of jacks for the  
inputs and outputs.  
32  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)  
You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system setting on  
page 85 to use this setup.  
Connecting to the network through  
LAN interface  
Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT  
By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN  
jacks on this receiver.1  
2
terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the  
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
(
)
XM  
IN  
LAN 10/100  
(
)
CONTROL  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 2)  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
SSIGNABLE  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
2
MONITOR  
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
DVD  
CD  
DVR/BDR  
OUT  
OUT 2  
IN  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER P  
(OUTPUT  
100 mA MAX  
LAN 10/100  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
Internet  
2
5
V
)
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ENTVIDEO  
NABLE  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
1
3
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
1
2
IN  
3
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
Modem  
DEO  
VIDEO IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3CD DVD  
OUT IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
(
)
OUT  
VIDEO  
SUBWOOFER  
MONITOR OUT  
SIGNAL  
GND  
ZONE  
2
OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OU  
FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
R
L
R
L
(Single  
L
PB  
PR  
KERS  
Wiring  
ANTENNA  
HT/WIDE/  
B
SURROUND BACK  
SU  
L
R
L
(Single)  
R
TABLE  
TRUCTION  
L
L
R
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
TABLE  
MODE  
OI  
LAN  
CONTROL  
IR  
1
T
IN  
IN  
1
3
2
1
WAN  
1
2
IN  
(
2
1
T
1
OUT  
Router  
CAUTION:  
OUT  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE  
ATTENTION:  
6
Ω - 16 Ω .  
Ω - 16 Ω .  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE  
6
LAN cable  
(sold separately)  
to LAN port  
PC  
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3)  
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3  
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT  
jack, both on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.  
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN  
terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP  
server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or  
higher).  
Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case  
your router does not have the built-in DHCP server  
function, it is necessary to set up the network manually.  
For details, see Network Setup menu on page 87.  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 3)  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
VIDEO IN  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
LAN terminal specifications  
(
D
LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ethernet jack  
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/  
I
(
)
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
ANTENNA  
AUDIO IN  
R
L
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIG  
1
2
IN  
(OUT  
12V  
TOTA  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
2
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
150  
m
OUT  
EXTENSION  
Note  
1 • COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images.  
• The GUI screen is not displayed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected.  
• The video convert function does not work for ZONE 2. Connect the composite video and component video to the same types of jacks for the  
inputs and outputs.  
2 To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.  
33  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting Optional Bluetooth®  
Connecting an XM Radio tuner  
After purchasing an XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock  
(both sold separately), you will also need to activate the  
XM Radio service to begin receiving broadcasts.  
ADAPTER  
When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (Pioneer Model No. AS-  
1
BT100) is connected to this receiver, a product equipped  
with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone,  
AC IN  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
LAN 10/100  
digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
100 mA MAX  
2
wirelessly.  
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
1
2
IN  
1
2
IN  
3
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
Bluetooth® ADAPTER (sold separately)  
-R/TAPE  
IN  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK  
L
OUT 2  
AC  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
LAN 10/100  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
R
)
100 mA MAX  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
1
2
IN  
3
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
CD-R/TAPE  
IN  
CD  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK  
L
R
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
SATELLiTE  
RADiO  
GNAL  
GND  
SATELLiTE RADiO  
Switch the receiver into standby and connect  
XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock  
Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT  
.
with antenna  
• For instructions on playing the Bluetooth wireless  
technology device, see Pairing the Bluetooth  
ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device  
on page 51.  
• For instructions on playing the XM Radio, see  
Listening to XM Radio on page 47.  
Connecting a SiriusConnect™ tuner  
Important  
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you will  
• Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth  
ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause damage  
or faulty contact.  
need to activate your SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
OUT 1  
OUT 2  
(
)
XM  
IN  
ADAPTER PORT  
LAN 10/100  
(
)
CONTROL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
)
100 mA MAX  
SIRIUS COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
1
2
IN  
3
MONITOR  
Connecting an HDMI-equipped  
OUT  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD  
CD  
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
component to the front panel input  
CD-PE  
DVR/BDR  
IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
T
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH/FW  
(Single)  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK  
L
OUT  
R
CONTROL ON/OFF  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
MULTI-ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
Antenna  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI 5  
VIDEO CAMERA  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
SiriusConnect™  
HOME tuner  
PHONES  
SIRIUS  
H
AC adapter  
You will also need to connect the antenna and AC  
adapter to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
For instructions on playing the SIRIUS Radio, see  
Video camera, etc.  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio on page 48.  
Note  
1 The Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100) is sold separately.  
2 • The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support A2DP profiles.  
• Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.  
34  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting an iPod  
03  
Switch the receiver into standby then connect your  
USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of  
this receiver.1  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow  
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod  
using the controls of this receiver.  
• For instructions on playing the USB device, see  
Playing a USB device on page 44.  
Switch the receiver into standby then use the  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod/  
iPhone/USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.  
• It is also possible to connect using the cable included  
with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view  
pictures via the receiver.  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
MULTI-ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI  
5
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
• For the cable connection, also refer to the operating  
instructions for your iPod.  
• For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an  
iPod on page 43.  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
USB mass  
storage device  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
MULTI-ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
iPod  
iPhone  
USB keyboard  
USB  
HDMI  
5
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
Connecting a USB device for Advanced  
MCACC output  
iPod cable  
(supplied)  
When using Full Auto MCACC (page 38), Auto MCACC  
(page 75) or Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
(page 79) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of your  
listening room, the 3D graphs of the reverb  
MENU  
  
characteristics in your listening room (before and after  
calibration) can be checked on a computer screen.  
iPod  
The various MCACC parameters can also be checked on  
the computer. MCACC data and parameters are  
transferred from this receiver to a USB device and by  
connecting the USB device to a computer, the data is  
imported via the MCACC software in the computer.  
Connecting a USB device  
It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting  
USB devices to this receiver. It is also possible to connect  
a USB keyboard (US-international layout) to the receiver  
to enter text in the following GUI screens.  
The MCACC software to output the results is available  
from the support area of the Pioneer website (http://  
www.pioneerelectronics.com/PUSA/  
Home+Entertainment+Custom+Install). Instructions  
for using the software are also available here. If you have  
any questions regarding, please contact the Customer  
Support Division of Pioneer.  
• Change the input name in the Input Setup menu  
(page 40).  
• Add names to radio station presets (page 46).  
• Enter Internet radio station URLs (page 49)  
.
See the documentation provided with the Advanced MCACC  
PC Display Application Software for more information.  
• For the USB device connection and operations, see  
2
Output MCACC data on page 82 .  
Note  
1 This receiver does not support a USB hub.  
2 The various parameters and the reverb characteristics data used for display on the computer are not cleared when the power is turned off (see  
Output MCACC data on page 82).  
35  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting an IR receiver  
03  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor  
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or  
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote  
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR  
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your  
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of  
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks  
which can be used to link components together so that  
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.  
When you use a remote control, the control signal is  
1
this receiver.  
2
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.  
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on  
the rear of this receiver.  
Important  
Closet or shelving unit  
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you  
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or  
HDMI jacks connected to another component for  
grounding purposes.  
Non-Pioneer  
component  
Pioneer  
component  
1
Decide which component you want to use the  
CONTROL  
IR  
IN  
remote sensor of.  
IN  
OUT  
When you want to control any component in the chain,  
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the  
corresponding remote control.  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
(
)
DVR/BDR  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/  
OUT  
(
)
VIDEO  
connection.  
MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
ZONE 2 OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
ANTENNA  
Y
PB  
PR  
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTIO  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
TRIGGER  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTIO  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
TRIGGER  
2
1
2
)
IN  
150 mA MAX  
OUT  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
150 mA MAX)  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(
OUTPUT  
5
V
OUT  
2
150 mA MA
OUT  
EXTENSION  
150 mA MAX)  
OUT  
EXTENSION  
IR receiver  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the  
IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the  
IR receiver.  
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for  
the type of cable necessary for the connection.  
Continue the chain in the same way for as many  
components as you have.  
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR  
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor below to connect to the  
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.  
Note  
1 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.  
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR  
compatibility.  
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.  
2 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control other components on  
page 68.  
• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the  
remote sensor.  
36  
En  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Switching components on and off using  
the 12 volt trigger  
Plugging in the receiver  
Only plug in after you have connected all your  
components to this receiver, including the speakers.  
You can connect components in your system (such as a  
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on  
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input  
function. However, you must specify which input  
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup  
menu on page 40. Note that this will only work with  
components that have a standby mode.  
1
Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket  
on the back of the receiver.  
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.1  
CAUTION  
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull  
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the  
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could  
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place  
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the  
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never  
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The  
power cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can  
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the  
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent  
service company for a replacement.  
OUT 1  
OUT  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IN  
4
(
)
CONTROL  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
4
COMPONENTVIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
(
)
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
DVR/BDR  
VIDE  
ZONE2  
OUT  
ZONE3  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVR/BDR  
OUT IN  
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
(
)
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
ZONE OUT  
2
SIGNAL  
Y
PB  
PR  
GND  
ANTENNA  
FRONT HEIGHT/W  
R
SPEAKERS  
Class 2Wiring  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
CONTROL  
IR  
12V  
TRIGGER  
RS-232C  
IN  
IN  
1
1
2
IN  
SELECTABLE  
VOIR LE MODE  
D'EMPLOI  
TPUT  
TO
(
OUTPUT  
150 mA MAX  
5
V
)
2
OUT  
150 mA MAX)  
OUT  
EXTENSION  
• Do not use any power cord other than the one  
supplied with this unit.  
12 V TRIGGER  
INPUT  
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose  
other than that described below.  
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the  
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular  
use, e.g., when on vacation.  
Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to  
the 12 V trigger of another component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone  
out before unplugging.  
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch  
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on  
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on  
page 40.  
• If you have connected speakers with a 6 Ω  
impedance, change the impedance setting before  
turning on the power.  
It is also possible to have the component switch not when  
the input function is switched, but when HDMI OUT is  
switched. For details, see HDMI Setup on page 57.  
Note  
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any  
operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver  
once it has stopped blinking. When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the Control with HDMI  
feature, see Control with HDMI function on page 57.  
37  
En  
Basic Setup  
04  
Chapter 4:  
Basic Setup  
Changing the OSD display language  
(OSD Language)  
Automatically conducting optimum  
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)  
The language used on the Graphical User Interface  
The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic  
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account  
ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and  
tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you  
have set up the microphone provided with your system,  
the receiver uses the information from a series of test  
tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization  
for your particular room.  
screen can be changed.  
• The explanations in these operating instructions are  
for when English is selected for the GUI screen.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver  
(for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO  
jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now  
selected).  
Important  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
2
Press  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit  
the current menu.  
• Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
• Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the  
headphones should be disconnected.  
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu  
.
4
Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup  
CAUTION  
menu.  
• The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setup  
are output at high volume.  
5
Select the desired language.  
Select ‘OK’ to change the language.  
6
®
The setting is completed and the System Setup menu  
reappears automatically.  
THX  
• THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be  
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.  
2
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
jack on the front panel.  
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel  
door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.  
38  
En  
Basic Setup  
04  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used for storing  
surround sound settings for different listening  
positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now  
(you can rename it later in Data Management on  
page 82).  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
MULTI-ZONE  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI  
5
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
THX Speaker – Select YES if you are using THX  
speakers (set all speakers to SMALL), otherwise leave  
it set to NO.  
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
Microphone  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then select  
4
Press  
START  
.
5
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
Tripod  
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re  
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to  
a comfortable volume level.  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you  
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the  
6
Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the  
speaker configuration in the GUI screen.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
it’s doing this.  
1
microphone.  
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the  
microphone is connected.  
2
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the  
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,  
the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In  
this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER  
in step 7.  
(
)
Speaker System  
EQ Type  
: Normal SB/FH  
SYMMETRY  
:
MCACC  
: M1.MEMORY 1  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
START  
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient  
noise! or Check microphone.), select RETRY after  
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40) and  
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to  
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
Exit  
Return  
3
Select the parameters you want to set.3  
If the speakers are connected using any setup other than  
Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set Speaker System before  
the Full Auto MCACC Setup. See Speaker system setting  
on page 85.  
4
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
Speaker System – Shows the current settings.  
A/V RECEIVER  
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Now Analyzing...  
2/10  
FHL  
C
When this is selected and ENTER is pressed, the  
speaker system selection screen appears. Select the  
proper speaker system, then press RETURN to return.  
FHR  
R
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
:
:
:
OK  
Speaker YES/NO  
SW  
10  
EQ Type – This determines how the frequency  
OK  
RETRY  
balance is adjusted.  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
Note  
1 Install the microphone on a stable floor. Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make accurate measurement  
impossible:  
• Sofas or other soft surfaces.  
• High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.  
2 If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
3 • When data measurement is taken, the reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will  
be overwritten. If you want to save the reverb characteristics data before measuring, connect a USB memory device to this receiver and  
transfer the data.  
• When measurement is taken of the reverb characteristics data other than SYMMETRY, the data are not measured after the correction. If  
you will need to measure after correcting data, take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup (page 77).  
4 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Speaker system  
setting on page 85 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.  
39  
En  
Basic Setup  
04  
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker  
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a  
problem with the speaker connection.  
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power  
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t  
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to  
select the speaker and / to change the setting  
and continue.  
The Input Setup menu  
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu  
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to  
the default settings (see Input function default and  
possible settings on page 41). In this case, you need to  
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which  
terminal so the buttons on the remote control  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring  
correspond to the components you’ve connected.  
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker  
1
connections.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
1
Press  
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,  
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.  
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure  
again.  
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
2
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu  
.
7
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings.  
4.System Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4b.Input Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Network Setup  
e. Other Setup  
Input  
:
:
:
DVD  
Rename  
OFF  
Input Name  
Input Skip  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.  
Digital In  
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1  
---  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
12V Trigger1  
12V Trigger2  
Comp-1  
OFF  
OFF  
8
The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed  
and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver  
upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
4
Select the input function that you want to set up.  
The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should  
give you excellent surround sound from your system, but  
it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using  
The Advanced MCACC menu on page 75 or The System  
The default names correspond with the names next to the  
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO)  
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote  
control.  
2
Setup and Other Setup menus on page 84.  
5
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your  
component.  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup  
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto  
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the  
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check  
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,  
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch  
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions  
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.  
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical  
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s  
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical  
input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to 3)  
corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the  
back of the receiver.  
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of  
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,  
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Note  
1 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective  
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.  
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with  
different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 84.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking  
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
• If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we  
recommend adjusting the settings manually.  
40  
En  
Basic Setup  
04  
6
When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for  
Input function default and possible settings  
The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the  
name of one of the input functions. If you have connected  
components to this receiver differently from (or in  
addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu  
on page 40 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up.  
The dots () indicate possible assignments.  
other inputs.  
There are optional settings in addition to the assignment  
of the input jacks:  
Input Name – You can choose to rename the input  
function for easier identification. Select Rename to  
do so, or Default to return to the system default.  
Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is skipped  
when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT. (DVD  
and other inputs can be still be selected directly with  
the input function buttons.)  
Input Terminals  
Input  
function  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
IN 1  
a
DVD  
COAX-1  
BD  
(BD)  
12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a component to  
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components  
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 37), select  
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding  
trigger setting to switch it on automatically along  
a
TV/SAT  
DVR/BDR  
VIDEO  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
HDMI 3  
HDMI 4  
OPT-1  
OPT-2  
OPT-3  
a
IN 2  
IN 3  
a
1
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
(HDMI-3)  
with the (main or sub) zone specified.  
7
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
(HDMI-4)  
HDMI 5  
(HDMI-5)  
(front panel)  
INTERNET  
RADIO  
iPod/USB  
XM RADIO  
CD  
COAX-2  
CD-R/TAPE  
TUNER  
ADAPTER  
PORT  
PHONO  
a
MULTI CH IN  
SIRIUS  
a.With Control with HDMI set to ON, assignments cannot be made  
(see Control with HDMI function on page 57).  
Note  
1 Devices connected to 12 volt triggers can be associated with HDMI OUT switching. For details, see HDMI Setup on page 57.  
41  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
Chapter 5:  
Basic playback  
Playing a source with HDMI connection  
Playing a source  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then use  
INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI input you’ve  
connected to (for example, HDMI 1).  
Press  
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such  
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.  
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.  
You can also perform the same operation by using the  
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing  
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.  
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control.  
2
3
Press  
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options  
on page 60 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI  
audio output from your TV (no sound will be heard  
from this receiver).  
Select the input function you want to play.  
You can use the input function buttons on the remote  
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT  
SELECTOR dial.  
1
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try  
adjusting the resolution settings on your component  
or display. Note that some components (such as  
video game units) have resolutions that may not be  
converted. In this case, use an analog video  
connection.  
4
Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/  
STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and  
start playback of the source.2  
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound  
source, you should hear surround sound. If you are  
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the  
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as  
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs  
• See also Listening to your system on page 53 for  
information on different ways of listening to sources.  
3
for surround sound playback.  
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether  
or not multi-channel playback is being performed  
properly. For details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream  
Direct with different input signal formats on page 106.  
1
Make sure you have set the playback source to the  
proper output setting.  
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to  
output multichannel analog audio.  
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PLIIx  
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals,  
and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-  
channel signals.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then use  
2
Press  
INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel.  
.
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and  
listening mode, check the connections and settings.  
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the  
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be  
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer  
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup  
in Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input  
Setup on page 90.  
5
Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.  
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is  
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.  
Note  
1 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 56).  
2 You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital,  
DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.  
3 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.  
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.  
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 90.  
42  
En  
Basic playback  
Playing an iPod  
05  
4
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
want to play, then press  
to start playback.  
This receiver has the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal that will  
allow you to control playback of audio content from your  
iPod using the controls of this receiver.  
Tip  
1
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category  
by selecting the All item at the top of each category  
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a  
particular artist.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
See Connecting an iPod on page 35.  
• It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod  
itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see  
Switching the iPod controls on page 43.  
Basic playback controls  
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for  
4
basic playback of files stored on an iPod.  
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the  
receiver to the iPod/USB  
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver  
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.  
.
• Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the  
iPod/USB operation mode.  
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
HDD  
DVD  
LIST TUNE TOOLS  
When the display shows the iPod top menu you’re ready  
to play music from the iPod.  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
2
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
TV  
/
DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
HDMI OUT  
2
AUDIO  
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod  
1
3
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP  
INFO  
DISP  
HOME  
MENU  
4
5
6
3
iPod CTRL  
of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.  
You can also control all operations for music in the front  
panel display of this receiver.  
5
Switching the iPod controls  
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod  
Finding what you want to play  
and the receiver.  
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can  
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name,  
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to  
using your iPod directly.  
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.  
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this  
receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become  
inactive.  
1
Use / to select ‘Music’ from the iPod top menu.  
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver  
controls.  
2
Use / to select a category, then press ENTER to  
browse that category.  
• To return to the previous level any time, press  
RETURN.  
3
Use / to browse the selected category (e.g.,  
albums).  
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.  
Note  
1 • This system is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano (audio only for the iPod nano 1G/2G), iPod fifth generation (audio only),  
iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone. However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The system is not compatible with  
the iPod shuffle.  
Compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be sure to use the latest available software  
version.  
• iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.  
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.  
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of  
recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.  
• When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub  
zone from the one playing in the main zone.  
2 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.  
3 • Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.  
• This feature is not available for photos on your iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on  
page 43).  
4 During Audiobook playback, press / to switch the playback speed: Faster Normal Slower  
5 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.  
43  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
want to play, then press  
to start playback.5  
Basic playback controls  
Playing a USB device  
1
It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the  
front of this receiver.  
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for  
basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
2
See Connecting a USB device on page 35.  
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the  
receiver to the iPod/USB 3  
• Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the  
iPod/USB operation mode.  
2
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
HDD  
DVD  
.
LIST TUNE TOOLS  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
AUDIO  
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts  
recognizing the USB device connected. When the display  
shows the USB Top menu you’re ready to play from the  
USB device.  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
TV  
/
DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
HDMI OUT  
2
1
3
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP  
INFO  
DISP  
HOME  
MENU  
4
5
6
iPod CTRL  
Important  
Playing back photo files stored on a USB  
memory device  
If an Over Current message lights in the display, the  
power requirements of the USB device are too high for  
this receiver. Try following the points below:  
6
1
Use / to select ‘Photos’ from the USB Top  
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.  
menu.  
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched  
off.  
2
Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to  
browse that folder.  
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the  
device) for USB power.  
To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB  
device is incompatible.  
want to play, then press  
The selected content is displayed in full screen and a  
to start playback.7  
slideshow starts.  
Playing back audio files stored on a USB  
After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles  
between play and pause (only when Theme on the  
Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF)).  
memory device  
The maximum number of levels that you can select in  
Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back  
up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory  
Basic playback controls  
4
device.  
Button(s) What it does  
1
Use / to select ‘Music’ from the USB Top menu.  
ENTER, Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.  
RETURN,  
Stops the player and returns to the previous  
menu.  
2
Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to  
browse that folder.  
a
• To return to the previous level any time, press  
RETURN.  
Displays the previous photo content.  
Displays the next photo content.  
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.  
Displays the photo information.  
a
a
a
DISP  
a.You can only use this button when Theme on the Slideshow Setup  
is set to Normal (OFF)  
Note  
1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio  
players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.  
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for  
any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.  
2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.  
3 The iPod/USB function cannot be selected in the main zone when the Internet radio function is selected in the sub zone. Also, the iPod/USB  
function cannot be selected in the sub zone when the Internet radio function is selected in the main zone.  
4 Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.  
5 • Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.  
• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.  
6 Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.  
7 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.  
44  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
Slideshow Setup  
Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo  
files here.  
1
Use / to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB  
Top menu.  
2 Select the setting you want.  
Theme – Add various effects to the slideshow.  
Interval – Set the interval for switching the photos.  
This may not be available depending on the Theme  
setting.  
BGM – Play music files stored on the USB device  
while displaying photos.  
Music Select – Select the folder containing the  
music files to be played when BGM is set to ON.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the USB Top menu.  
About playable file formats  
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback  
although they are listed as playable file formats.  
Music files  
Category Extension Stream  
a
.mp3  
MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Layer-3  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
MP3  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
8 bit, 16 bit  
VBR/CBR  
WAV  
.wav  
LPCM  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
2 ch, Monaural  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
b
WMA  
.wma  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
WMA8/9  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
VBR/CBR  
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”  
b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,  
Voice.  
Photo files  
Category Extension  
JPEG  
.jpg  
.jpeg  
.jpe  
.jif  
Format  
Meeting the following conditions:  
• Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF format)  
• Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0  
Resolution  
30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal  
.jfif  
45  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
Tuning directly to a station  
Listening to the radio  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and  
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the  
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a  
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can  
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving  
station presets below for more on how to do this.  
2
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if  
necessary.  
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).  
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of  
4
the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.  
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS  
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.  
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if  
necessary.  
Saving station presets  
3
Tune to a station.  
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s  
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for  
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.  
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This  
receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven  
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.  
There are three ways to do this:  
Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the  
currently selected band, press and hold TUNE /  
for about a second. The receiver will start searching  
for the next station, stopping when it has found one.  
Repeat to search for other stations.  
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.  
Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step  
at a time, press TUNE /.  
See Listening to the radio above for more on this.  
High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE / for  
high speed tuning. Release the button at the  
frequency you want.  
2
Press T.EDIT TUNER EDIT).  
(
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking  
memory class.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then  
Improving FM sound  
press PRESET / to select the station preset you  
want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a station  
preset.  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when  
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press  
MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode.  
This should improve the sound quality and allow you to  
enjoy the broadcast.  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the station.  
Using the noise cut mode  
The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM  
broadcasts. Press MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to  
2).  
Listening to station presets  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
Using Neural Surround  
This feature uses Neural Surround™ technologies to  
achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.  
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT for Neural Surround.  
3
Press PRESET / to select the station preset you  
want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
The Neural Surround mode can be selected also with  
STANDARD.  
control to recall the station preset.  
Naming station presets  
For easier identification, you can name your station  
presets.  
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.  
See Listening to station presets above for how to do this.  
46  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
2
Press T.EDIT  
(
TUNER EDIT).  
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers  
can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit  
sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada).  
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor  
at the first character position.  
3
Input the name you want.  
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,  
and ENTER to confirm your selection.  
Listening to XM Radio  
For details on XM Radio, see About SIRIUS and XM on  
page 105.  
Tip  
1
Press XM to switch to the XM RADIO input.  
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3  
and input eight spaces instead of a name.  
For best reception, you may need to move the XM Mini-  
Tuner antenna near a window (the southernmost window  
should produce the best results).  
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press  
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display  
between name and frequency.  
• If after pressing XM the display shows Check XM  
Tuner or Check Antenna, try disconnecting the  
receiver and tuner connections, and then plugging  
1
them back in.  
Listening to Satellite Radio  
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to  
select channels and navigate categories using the GUI  
screen.  
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either  
a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to  
your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to  
residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and  
Canada.  
2
Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
From the XM Channel Guide, you can browse XM Radio  
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free  
music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country,  
R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus  
coverage of all the top professional and college sports  
including play by play games from select leagues and  
teams. Additional programming includes expert sports  
talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family  
programming, local traffic and weather and news from  
your most trusted sources.  
channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow  
3
your channel search by genre.  
1
Press / to enter the XM Channel Guide, navigate  
through the channels one at time with /, then press  
ENTER to listen to the XM radio broadcast.  
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /  
to select a genre, then press ENTER.  
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.  
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need  
to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service.  
Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are  
provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you  
choose, there are a variety of programming packages  
available, including the option of adding “The Best of  
SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of  
XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to  
enjoy the most popular programming among both  
services. The “Best of” packages are not available to  
SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time.  
Tip  
• You can select channels directly by pressing  
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.  
• You can press DISP to change XM Radio information  
in the front panel display.  
• The currently selected channel is automatically  
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after five seconds.  
Using XM HD Surround  
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict  
channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for  
children.  
XM HD Surround uses Neural Surround™ technologies  
to achieve optimal surround sound from XM radio. XM  
HD Surround Sound is available on select XM channels  
only.  
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit  
xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346);  
Canadian customers should visit xmradio.ca or call XM  
Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).  
While listening to XM Radio, press AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT for XM HD Surround listening.  
XM HD Surround can be selected also with STANDARD.  
Note  
1 You can check the strength of reception in Using the XM Menu on page 48.  
2 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do  
everything if you prefer.  
3 Select 0 (RADIO ID) from the GUI to check the Radio ID of the XM Mini-Tuner.  
47  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved  
Saving channel presets  
song information (see Tip above).  
This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, stored in  
1
seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 channels each.  
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU to return to  
the reception display.  
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.  
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on  
page 47.  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio  
2
Press T.EDIT  
.
For details on SIRIUS Radio, see About SIRIUS and XM on  
The display shows a blinking memory class.  
page 105.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then  
1
Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS input.  
press / to select the channel preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.  
For best reception, you may need to move the  
SiriusConnect™ tuner antenna near a window (refer to  
the manual for the SiriusConnect™ Home tuner for  
• The default for all presets is XM1.  
3
4
Press ENTER.  
antenna placement recommendations).  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the XM channel.  
• If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows Antenna  
Error, try disconnecting the antenna and  
4
reconnecting. If the display shows Check Sirius  
Tip  
Tuner, check the connection of the AC adapter and  
this receiver to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
• You can also press MEMORY during reception  
display to save the information of up to five songs.  
See Using the XM Menu below to recall this  
information.  
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to  
select channels and navigate categories using the GUI  
5
screen display.  
Listening to channel presets  
Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can browse SIRIUS  
Radio channels in the order that they appear, or you can  
narrow your channel search by genre.  
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
2
Press / to select the channel preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the channel preset.  
1
Press / to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide,  
navigate through the channels one at time with /  
then press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio  
broadcast.  
,
Using the XM Menu  
The XM Menu provides additional XM Radio features.  
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /  
to select a genre, then press ENTER.  
2
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.  
1
Press TOP MENU  
.
2
Use / to select a menu item, then press ENTER  
.
Tip  
Choose from the following menu items:  
• You can select channels directly by pressing  
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.  
Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to  
the channel guide.  
• You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio  
information in the front panel display.  
Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite  
and terrestrial reception.  
Note  
1 You can reset the channel presets and memory in Resetting the system on page 66.  
2 You can reset the Channel Skip/Add settings in Resetting the system on page 66.  
3 • In order to activate your radio subscription, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be found on  
a sticker located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have  
located the SID, write it down in the space provided near the end of this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the internet at: https://  
activate.siriusradio.com  
Follow the prompts to activate your subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474).  
• Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the SiriusConnect™ tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by  
genre on page 48).  
4 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 49.  
5 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do  
everything if you prefer.  
48  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
• The currently selected channel is automatically  
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after five seconds.  
Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to place under parental lock.  
Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in  
the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by directly  
inputting their channel number and providing the  
parental lock password.  
Saving channel presets  
This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, stored in  
seven banks, or classes (A to G) of nine channels each.  
1
Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite  
and terrestrial reception.  
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.  
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on  
page 48.  
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved  
song information (see Tip above).  
2
Press T.EDIT  
.
Password Set – Set the parental lock password.  
The display shows a blinking memory class.  
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU to return to  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then  
the reception display.  
press / to select the channel preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.  
4
Press ENTER.  
Listening to Internet radio stations  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel.  
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service  
3
transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of  
Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services  
from every corner of the world. Some are hosted,  
managed, and broadcast by private individuals while  
others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial  
radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or  
OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically  
restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a  
transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are  
accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there  
is a connection to the Internet, as services are not  
transmitted through the air but are delivered over the  
World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet  
radio stations by genre as well as by region.  
Tip  
• You can also press MEMORY during reception  
display to save the information of up to five songs.  
See Using the SIRIUS Menu below to recall this  
information.  
Listening to channel presets  
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
2
Press / to select the channel preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the channel preset.  
Important  
• Before listening to Internet radio, you need to  
program the Internet radio stations you wish to listen  
to onto this unit. See Programming the Internet radio  
stations on page 50 for how to program. Though the  
Internet radio stations are programmed in this  
receiver before it leaves the factory, the link may have  
expired. In that case, preset the stations again  
yourself.  
Using the SIRIUS Menu  
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio  
2
features.  
1
Press TOP MENU  
.
2
Use / to select a menu item, then press ENTER  
.
Choose from the following menu items:  
Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to  
the channel guide.  
1
Press NET RADIO to switch to the Internet radio  
input.4  
The Internet Radio list screen is displayed.  
Note  
1 You can reset the Channel presets and memory in Resetting the system on page 66.  
2 You can reset the Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 66.  
3 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy  
the full benefits of Internet radio.  
• The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.  
• Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected  
from the list of Internet radio stations.  
4 The Internet radio function cannot be selected in the main zone when the iPod/USB function is selected in the sub zone. Also, the Internet  
radio function cannot be selected in the sub zone when the iPod/USB function is selected in the main zone.  
49  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
2
Use / to select the Internet radio station to play  
When the connection is made with the receiver, a Top  
Menu will be displayed.  
back, and then press ENTER  
.
Press / to scroll up and down the list and select the  
desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts  
with the playback screen being displayed for the selected  
item. Depending on the Internet line conditions, the  
sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio.  
• This receiver’s IP address can be found in the ‘IP  
address, Proxy’ menu (page 87).  
3
Select ‘Internet Radio Setting’.  
The following programming screen will be shown on the  
browser.  
1
To return to the list screen, press RETURN.  
T
T
o
o
p
p
Menu  
Menu  
Pioneer  
Internet Radio Setting  
Programming the Internet radio stations  
By programming the Internet radio stations you wish to  
listen to onto this receiver, you will be able to select those  
Internet radio stations. You can program up to 24  
stations.  
J-POP  
Title  
1
Update  
Update  
Update  
Update  
Update  
Update  
Update  
Update  
Connection OK  
Connection OK  
Connection OK  
Connection OK  
Connection OK  
Connection OK  
Connection OK  
Connection OK  
http://www.xxxxxxx.net:9500  
URL  
Title  
URL  
Title  
URL  
Title  
URL  
Title  
URL  
Title  
URL  
Title  
URL  
Title  
URL  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rock  
http://www.xxxxxxx.com:8096  
Classic  
http://www.yyyyyyy.com:8800  
STATION6  
http://zzzzzzz.com:7040  
ENKA  
http://www.zyxzyx.com:6000  
There are two methods of programming: one lets you use  
the GUI screen on this receiver; the other lets you  
connect your computer and use that screen.  
4
Enter the title and URL of the Internet radio station  
you wish to program, then press ‘Update’.  
The entered information will be transmitted to the  
receiver.  
Programming with the GUI screen  
1
Press TOP MENU when the Internet Radio station  
The connection to the URL designated from the  
computer will be confirmed:  
list is displayed.  
The Internet Radio Setup screen is displayed.  
If connection is successful, ‘Connection OK’ will be  
displayed on screen, and the selected Internet radio  
station will begin playing via this receiver.  
2
Use / to select the Internet Radio station list  
screen you wish to edit, and then press ENTER  
.
3
Use / to select “Edit“.  
If the connection failed, ‘Connection NG’ will be  
• If you select Delete, information regarding the  
Internet radio stations programmed into the currently  
selected memory will be deleted.  
displayed. Check to see if the URL you entered is correct.  
Important  
4
Enter the URL of the Internet radio station you wish  
• ‘Connection OK’ and ‘Connection NG’ are only  
displayed when this receiver is set to the Internet  
radio function.  
to program.2  
Use / to select a letter and / to move the cursor.  
• A URL containing up to 192 letters can be entered.  
• When entering the title and URL of Internet radio  
station, do not press ‘Update’ while you are  
connected to other stations (i.e., labelled as  
Connecting...”).  
5
Enter the title of the Internet radio station.  
Use / to select a letter and / to move the cursor.  
• A title containing up to 22 letters can be entered.  
Programming on the computer screen  
You can enter the Internet radio list on the screen of a  
computer that is connected to the same LAN as this  
receiver, and send the list to this unit.  
The computer needs to be connected in advance to the  
network of this receiver and set up.  
1
Turn on the computer and launch the Internet  
browser.  
2
In the address bar on the browser, enter the IP  
address assigned to this receiver.  
For example, if the IP address of this receiver is  
“192.168.0.2”, enter “http://192.168.0.2/”.  
Note  
1 When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10  
seconds while the list screen is displayed.  
2 The URL can also be entered by connecting a USB keyboard (see Connecting a USB device on page 35).  
50  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth  
wireless technology device  
Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless  
Enjoyment of Music  
“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of  
Bluetooth wireless technology content using the  
Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the  
first time you operate the system or any time pairing data  
is cleared. The pairing step is necessary to register the  
Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth  
Device not  
equipped with  
Bluetooth wireless  
technology:  
Digital music  
player  
+
3
communications. For more details, see also the  
Bluetooth wireless  
technology  
Bluetooth  
operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless  
technology device.  
wireless  
enabled device:  
Digital music  
player  
Bluetooth audio  
transmitter  
(sold commercially)  
technology  
enabled device:  
cell phone  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
1
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
2
3
4
Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER  
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then press  
.
.
ENTER  
.
Bluetooth®  
ADAPTER  
Music data  
This receiver  
5
Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want.  
Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth wireless  
technology device you wish to connect.  
0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from these  
options. These are the passcodes that can be used in  
most cases.  
Others – Select to use a passcode other than those  
mentioned above.  
6
If you selected Others in step 5, enter the passcode.  
Remote control  
operation  
Use / to select a number and / to move the  
cursor.  
7
Follow the instructions displayed on the GUI screen  
Wireless music play  
to conduct pairing with the Bluetooth wireless  
technology device.  
Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology device that  
you want to make pair, place it near the receiver and set  
it to the pairing mode.  
When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (Pioneer Model No. AS-  
1
BT100) is connected to this unit, a product equipped  
with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone,  
digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music  
wirelessly. Also, by using a commercially available  
transmitter supporting Bluetooth wireless technology,  
you can listen to music on a device not equipped with  
Bluetooth wireless technology. The AS-BT100 model  
supports SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also  
be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T type  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
8
Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is  
detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device.  
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is  
connected:  
4
CONNECTED appears in the receiver display.  
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not  
connected:  
Remote control operation  
Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In this case,  
perform the connection operation from the Bluetooth  
wireless technology device.  
The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to  
play and stop media, and perform other operations.  
2
Note  
1 The Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100) is sold separately.  
2 • It must be necessary that the Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device supports AVRCP profiles.  
• Remote control operations cannot be guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.  
3 • Pairing is required when you first use the Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.  
• To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless technology device.  
4 The system can display alphanumeric characters only. Other characters may not be displayed correctly.  
51  
En  
Basic playback  
05  
9
From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list,  
select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the Passcode  
selected in step 5.1  
Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth  
wireless technology device with your system  
1
Press ADAPTER on the remote control to switch the  
receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.2  
From the Bluetooth wireless technology device,  
2
perform the operation to connect to the Bluetooth  
ADAPTER.  
3
Start playback of music contents stored on the  
Bluetooth wireless technology device.  
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for  
basic playback of files stored on Bluetooth wireless  
3
technology devices.  
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
AUDIO  
TV  
/
DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
3
HDMI OUT  
2
1
®
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered  
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of  
such marks by Pioneer Corporation is under license.  
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their  
respective owners.  
Note  
1 The passcode may in some cases be referred to as PASSKEY or PIN code.  
2 When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged into the ADAPTER PORT, NO ADAPTER will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is selected.  
3 • Bluetooth wireless technology device should be compatible with AVRCP profile.  
• Depending on the Bluetooth wireless technology device you use, operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons.  
52  
En  
Listening to your system  
06  
Chapter 6:  
Listening to your system  
Important  
Listening in surround sound  
• The listening modes and many features described in  
this section may not be available depending on the  
current source, settings and status of the receiver.  
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in  
surround sound. However, the options available will  
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source  
you’re listening to.  
Auto playback  
Standard surround sound  
The following modes provide basic surround sound for  
stereo and multichannel sources.  
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this  
receiver, but the simplest, most direct listening option is  
the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically  
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects  
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control.  
1
2
Press  
While listening to a source, press STANDARD  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control.  
1
2
Press  
(STANDARD SURROUND).  
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
playback of a source.  
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before  
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the  
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see  
how the source is being processed.  
(
AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT) for auto  
/
/
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround  
encoded, the proper decoding format will  
automatically be selected and shows in the display.  
1
With two channel sources, you can select from:  
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Up to 7.1 channel sound  
(surround back), especially suited to movie sources  
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround  
encoded, the proper decoding format will  
automatically be selected and shows in the display.  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Up to 7.1 channel sound  
2
(surround back), especially suited to music sources  
2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound  
(surround back), especially suited to video games  
• When listening to the FM radio, the Neural Surround  
feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural  
Surround on page 46 for more on this).  
2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound  
from the surround speakers is mono)  
• When listening to the ADAPTER PORT input, the  
SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is selected  
automatically (see Listening in stereo on page 55 for  
more on this).  
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel sound  
3
(front height)  
WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound  
(front wide), especially suited to movie sources4  
• When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD Surround  
feature is selected automatically (see Using XM HD  
Surround on page 47 for more on this).  
WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound  
4
(front wide), especially suited to music sources  
ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver  
equalizes playback sound levels.  
Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound (surround  
5
back), especially suited to movie sources  
Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound (surround back),  
especially suited to music sources  
Tip  
5
• When ALC is selected, the effect level can be  
adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the  
Audio options on page 60.  
Note  
1 If the surround back speakers are not connected or V.SB is switched OFF (page 61), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel  
sound).  
2 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH,  
DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 60 to adjust them.  
3 • This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH).  
• When listening sources in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 60).  
4 This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FW).  
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio  
options on page 60).  
53  
En  
Listening to your system  
06  
Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound  
(surround back), especially suited to music sources  
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
1
XM HD Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
2
especially suited to music sources  
2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES  
With multichannel sources, if you have connected  
surround back, front height or front wide speakers, you can  
select (according to format):  
3
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA  
3
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above  
3
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above  
5
THX SELECT2 GAMES  
Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel  
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure  
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital  
Surround EX)  
With multichannel sources, press THX (HOME THX)  
repeatedly to select from:  
THX CINEMA  
THX MUSIC  
THX GAMES  
DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS-ES encoded sources  
DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS encoded sources  
THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
3
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA  
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above  
4
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA  
WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above  
5
THX SELECT2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
4
WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above  
• Straight Decode – Plays back without the effects  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
above.  
3
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA  
Using the Home THX modes  
3
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC  
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by  
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX  
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like  
what you hear in a cinema.  
3
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES  
5
THX SELECT2 MUSIC – This mode is suited not only  
for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but also  
to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-Audio, etc.).  
5
Different THX options will be available depending on the  
source and the setting for surround back channel  
processing (see THX Audio Setting on page 87 for more  
on this).  
THX SELECT2 GAMES – This mode is suited to  
playing the sound of games.  
Using the Advanced surround effects  
RECEIVER  
1
Press  
on the remote control.  
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of  
additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced Surround  
modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but  
some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different  
settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.  
Press THX  
(HOME THX) to select a listening mode.  
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select  
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode  
(see THX Audio Setting on page 87 for an explanation of  
each process):  
RECEIVER  
1
2
Press  
on the remote control.  
ADVANCED SURROUND  
THX CINEMA  
Press ADV SURR  
(
)
THX MUSIC  
repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic  
THX GAMES  
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA  
2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA  
soundtracks  
DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog  
Note  
1 Neural Surround can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-  
channel sources.  
2 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM input.  
3 • This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH).  
• When listening sources in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 60).  
4 This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FW).  
5 Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected or not connected.  
54  
En  
Listening to your system  
06  
SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of  
special effects  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance  
MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono  
soundtracks  
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to  
create natural surround sound effects using just the front  
speakers and the subwoofer.  
ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources  
EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control.  
1
2
Press  
TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both  
mono and stereo TV sources  
While listening to a source, press STEREO to select  
Front Stage Surround Advance modes.  
STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on  
this.  
ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games  
SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs  
CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound  
F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround  
sound effect directed to the center of where the front  
left and right speakers sound projection area  
converges.  
ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock  
and/or pop music  
UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources  
F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound  
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.  
EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo  
source, using all of your speakers  
FOCUS position  
WIDE position  
PHONES SURR – When listening through  
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall  
surround.  
(Recommended)  
Frontright Front left  
speaker speaker  
Frontright  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
Tip  
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is  
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the  
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on  
page 60.  
Listening in stereo  
Using Stream Direct  
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source  
through just the front left and right speakers (and  
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker  
settings). Multichannel sources are downmixed to  
stereo.  
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the  
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary  
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the  
pure analog or digital sound source. Processing differs  
depending on the input signal and whether or not  
surround back speakers are connected. For details, see  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input  
signal formats on page 106.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control.  
1
2
Press  
While listening to a source, press STEREO for stereo  
playback.  
Press repeatedly to switch between:  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control.  
1
2
Press  
While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/  
STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound  
settings and you can still use the audio options.  
DIRECT  
(
AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT) to select  
/
/
the mode you want.  
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel  
display to see how the source is being processed.  
F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround  
Advance below for more on this.  
F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround  
Advance below for more on this.  
AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 53.  
ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode (page 53).  
1
SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for listening to  
the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology  
device.  
DIRECT – Plays back sound from the source with the  
least modification next to PURE DIRECT. With  
DIRECT, the only modifications added to PURE  
DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by  
the MCACC system and the Phase Control effect.  
Note  
1 The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only selected when the ADAPTER PORT input.  
55  
En  
Listening to your system  
06  
4
PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified sound from  
source with only minimal digital treatment. No sound  
is output from the Speaker B in this mode.  
PCM – For PCM input signals. The receiver selects  
the first available signal in the following order: HDMI;  
DIGITAL.  
When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only selected  
DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light according to the  
signal being decoded (see Display on page 12).  
Selecting MCACC presets  
• Default setting: MEMORY 1  
If you have calibrated your system for different listening  
positions, you can switch between settings to suit the  
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting  
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a  
video game close to the TV).  
Better sound using Phase Control  
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase  
correction measures to make sure your sound source  
arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing  
unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control.  
1
2
Press  
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound  
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an  
optimal sound image. The default setting is on and we  
recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all  
sound sources.  
5
While listening to a source, press MCACC  
.
1
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets .  
See Data Management on page 82 to check and manage  
your current settings.  
RECEIVER  
1
Press  
on the remote control.  
PHASE CONTROL) to switch on  
Choosing the input signal  
Press PHASE CTRL  
(
phase correction.  
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.  
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals  
2
for the different inputs as described below.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control.  
1
2
Press  
Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal  
corresponding to the source component.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal  
in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.  
ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.  
DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.  
3
HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.  
Note  
1 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.  
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.  
2 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats.  
The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,  
DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.  
• You may get digital noise when an LD, CD, DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the  
proper digital connections (page 29) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.  
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.  
3 When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.  
4 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.  
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.  
5 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough  
together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will  
be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.  
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.  
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when  
PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also  
recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.  
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher  
value.  
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.  
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:  
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.  
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 60.  
56  
En  
Control with HDMI function  
Chapter 7:  
07  
Control with HDMI function  
Synchronized operations below with a Control with  
HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray disc player or  
Important  
with a component of another make that supports the  
Control with HDMI functions are possible when the  
component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI  
cable.  
• When connecting this system or changing  
connections, be sure to switch the power off and  
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.  
After completing all connections, connect the power  
cords to the wall socket.  
• The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can  
be muted using the TV’s remote control.  
• After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2  
second to 10 second HDMI initialization process  
begins. You cannot carry out any operations during  
initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit  
blinks during initialization, and you can turn this  
receiver on once it has stopped blinking.  
• The receiver’s input switches over automatically  
when the TV’s channel is changed or a Control with  
HDMI-compatible component is played.  
• The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the  
TV’s power is set to standby.  
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend  
that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but  
rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.  
Important  
• With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI  
functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.  
• While the receiver is equipped with six HDMI inputs  
(BD, HDMI 1 to 5), the Control with HDMI function  
can only be used with up to three DVD or Blu-ray disc  
players or up to three DVD or Blu-ray disc recorders.  
• You cannot use this function with components that  
do not support Control with HDMI.  
• The Control with HDMI function can be used with a  
TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, but not  
with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal.  
• We do not guarantee this receiver will work with  
Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible components  
or components of other makes that support the  
Control with HDMI function. We do not guarantee  
that all synchronized operations will work with  
components of other makes that support the Control  
with HDMI function.  
HDMI Setup  
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the  
connected Control with HDMI-compatible components  
in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function.  
For more information see the operating instructions for  
each component.  
®
• Use a High Speed HDMI cable when you want to  
use the Control with HDMI function. The Control  
with HDMI function may not work properly if a  
different type of HDMI cable is used.  
• For details about concrete operations, settings, etc.,  
refer to also the operating instructions for each  
component.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
1
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
2
Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
3
4
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
Making Control with HDMI  
connections  
Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER  
Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.  
.
5
You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV  
Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with HDMI  
function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use  
the Control with HDMI function.  
and up to five other components.  
• Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to the audio  
input of this unit. When the TV and receiver are  
connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports  
the HDMI Audio Return Channel function, the sound  
of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1  
terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio  
cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to  
via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 57).  
When using a component that does not support the  
Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF.  
ON – Enables the Control with HDMI function. When  
this unit’s power is turned off and you have a  
supported source begin playback while using the  
Control with HDMI function, the audio and video  
outputs from the HDMI connection are output from  
the TV.  
For details, see Connecting your TV and playback  
components on page 24.  
57  
En  
Control with HDMI function  
07  
OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled.  
Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this  
unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources  
connected via HDMI are not output.  
Before using synchronization  
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you  
must:  
6
Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you want.  
1
Put all components into standby mode.  
Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for all linked  
functions or the PQLS function only. However, Display  
Power Off will activate the settings set forth in step 7  
below.  
2
Turn the power on for all components, with the  
power for the TV being turned on last.  
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is  
ALL – Enabled for all linked functions.  
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from  
connected components displays properly on the screen  
or not.  
PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function. When  
PQLS is selected, link functions other than the PQLS  
function may not work properly. If you wish to use all  
link functions, select ALL.  
4
Check whether the components connected to all  
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.  
7
Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.  
If the TV’s power is turned off while using the Control  
with HDMI function, the receiver’s power is also turned  
off (all power off function). This function can be disabled.  
About synchronized operations  
The Control with HDMI-compatible component  
connected to the receiver operates in sync as described  
below.  
YES – The all power off function is enabled. The  
receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power.  
This function only works when the input for a  
component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV.  
• From the menu screen of the Control with HDMI-  
compatible TV, set audio to be played through this  
receiver, and the receiver will switch to the  
synchronized amp mode.  
NO – The all power off function is disabled. The  
receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power  
is turned off.  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, you can adjust  
the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the  
TV’s remote control.  
8
Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.  
It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI-connected  
player to the TV when this receiver's power is on standby  
as long as Control is ON, but the amount of energy  
consumed rises. It is, however, possible to minimize  
energy consumption when power is set to standby.  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the  
synchronized amp mode is canceled when the  
receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the  
synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to be  
played through the receiver from the TV’s menu  
screen, etc. This receiver will power up and switch to  
the synchronized amp mode.  
Normal – Regular setting. Power-up time from  
standby is short.  
• When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the  
receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an  
HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.  
Eco – Conserves energy while standby. Power-up  
time is longer than when set to Normal.  
9
Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want.  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the  
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation  
that produces sound from the TV is performed from  
the TV’s menu screen, etc.  
When a TV supporting the HDMI Audio Return Channel  
function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV  
can be input via the HDMI terminal.  
Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the Audio  
input terminals other than HDMI inputs.  
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s  
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for  
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV.)  
via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the HDMI  
terminal. This can only be selected when Control is  
set to ON.  
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the  
10 Select the ‘12V Trigger’ setting you want.  
The component connected to the 12V TRIGGER jack can  
be turned on and off when HDMI OUT is switched. HDMI  
OUT 1, HDMI OUT 2 or OFF can be selected. Select OFF  
when you want the component to switch when the input  
function is switched.  
Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.  
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the  
TV’s channel is switched.  
• The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if  
the receiver’s input is switched to a component other  
than one connected by HDMI.  
11 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU  
.
58  
En  
Control with HDMI function  
07  
The operations below can also be used on Pioneer  
Control with HDMI-compatible TVs.  
• On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround,  
PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio  
output to Linear PCM.  
• When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound  
is muted, the volume status is displayed on the TV’s  
screen.  
• On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio, PQLS  
only works when playing CDs.  
• When the OSD language is switched on the TV, the  
receiver’s language setting also switches  
accordingly.  
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
your player for more information.  
1
This function is activated when Control is set to ON.  
About connections with a product of a  
different brand that supports the Control  
with HDMI function  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
PQLS to select the PQLS setting.  
The setting is displayed on the front panel display.  
Press  
The synchronized operations below can be used when  
the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected  
to a TV of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the  
Control with HDMI function. (Depending on the TV,  
however, some of the Control with HDMI functions may  
not work.)  
PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz  
controller in this receiver eliminates distortion  
caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best  
possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use  
the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function  
for PQLS-compatible players.  
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s  
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for  
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV)  
PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.  
Cautions on the Control with HDMI  
function  
• The sound of TV programs or an external input  
connected to the TV can also be output from the  
speakers connected to the receiver. (If the TV does  
not support the HDMI Audio Return Channel  
function, this requires connection of an optical  
digital cable, etc., in addition to the HDMI cable.)  
• Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a  
direct connection with other amps or an AV converter  
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational  
errors.  
• Only connect components (Blu-ray disc player, etc.)  
you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of  
this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with  
other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI  
switch) can cause operational errors.  
The synchronized operations below can be used when  
the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected  
to a player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that  
supports the Control with HDMI function.  
• When playback starts on the player or recorder, the  
receiver’s input switches to the HDMI input to which  
that component is connected.  
• When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input in The Input  
Setup menu on page 40 is automatically set to OFF.  
• When the receiver’s Control is turned ON, even if the  
receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible  
to output the audio and video signals from a player  
via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the  
receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI-  
compatible component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) and  
compatible TV are connected. In this case, the  
receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI  
indicators light.  
See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the  
models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support  
the Control with HDMI function.  
Setting the PQLS function  
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio  
signal transfer control technology using the Control with  
HDMI function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by  
controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS  
compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that  
has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is  
generated upon transmission.  
Note  
1 • If a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected while the PQLS effect is enabled, the  
PQLS effect is disabled.  
• When this receiver is connected by HDMI cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection and  
HDMI reauthentication is performed (the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening mode is set to AUTO  
SURROUND if a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected.  
59  
En  
Using other functions  
08  
Chapter 8:  
Using other functions  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
BYPASS  
ON  
Setting the Audio options  
TONE  
(Tone  
Control)  
Applies the treble and bass tone  
controls to a source, or bypasses  
them completely.  
There are a number of additional sound settings you can  
make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The  
defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.  
a
Adjusts the amount of bass.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
Default: 0 (dB)  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
Default: 0 (dB)  
BASS  
a
Adjusts the amount of treble.  
TREBLE  
Important  
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO  
PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the  
current source, settings and status of the receiver.  
b
S.RTRV  
(Sound  
With the Sound Retriever  
function, DSP processing is used  
OFF  
ON  
Retriever) to compensate for the loss of  
audio data upon compression,  
improving the sound’s sense of  
density and modulation.  
RECEIVER  
AUDIO PARAMETER  
1
Press  
on the remote control, then press  
.
2
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.  
DNR  
(Digital  
Noise  
May improve the quality of sound  
in a noisy source (for example,  
video tape with lots of background  
OFF  
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
ON  
Reduction) noise) when switched on.  
DIALOG E Localizes dialog in the center  
OFF  
FLAT  
3
Use / to set as necessary.  
(Dialog  
Enhance  
ment)  
channel to make it stand out from  
other background sounds in a TV  
or movie soundtrack. By moving  
from UP1 through UP2 and UP3  
up to UP4, you can make the  
sound source seem to relocate  
upwards.  
See the table below for the options available for each  
setting.  
UP1/UP2/UP3/  
c
UP4  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
MCACC  
(MCACC  
preset)  
Selects your favorite MCACC  
preset memory when multiple  
preset memoriesare saved. When M6. MEMORY 6  
an MCACC preset memory has  
been renamed, the given name is  
displayed.  
M1. MEMORY 1  
Creates a wider dynamic range with  
digital sources like CDs or DVDs.  
Smoother, more delicate musical  
expression can be achieved by  
requantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit  
compressed audio signals to 24 bit.  
to  
Hi-bit  
(High Bit/  
High  
OFF  
ON  
Default:  
M1. MEMORY 1  
Sampling)  
EQ  
Switches on/off the effects of EQ  
Pro.  
ON  
DUAL  
(Dual  
Mono)  
Specifies how dual mono  
encoded Dolby Digital  
soundtracks should be played.  
Dual mono is not widely used, but  
is sometimes necessary when  
two languages need to be sent to  
separate channels.  
CH1Channel  
1 is heard only  
(Acoustic  
Calibration  
EQ)  
OFF  
CH2Channel  
2 is heard only  
S-WAVE  
Switches on/off the effects of  
ON  
(Standing Standing Wave Control.  
Wave)  
CH1 CH2 –  
Both channels  
heard from  
OFF  
DELAY  
(Sound  
Delay)  
Some monitors have a slight  
delay when showing video, so the  
soundtrack will be slightly out of  
sync with the picture. By adding a  
bit of delay, you can adjust the  
sound to match the presentation  
of the video.  
0.0 to 10.0  
(frames)  
front speakers  
d
DRC  
Adjusts the level of dynamic  
1 second = 30  
frames (NTSC)  
AUTO  
(Dynamic range for movie soundtracks  
MAX  
MID  
OFF  
Range  
Control)  
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,  
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,  
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master  
Audio (you may need to use this  
feature when listening to  
Default: 0.0  
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective  
surround sound of movies at low  
volumes.  
MIDNIGHT/  
LOUDNESS  
OFF  
surround sound at low volumes).  
MIDNIGHT ON  
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble  
from music sources at low  
volumes.  
LOUDNESS  
ON  
60  
En  
Using other functions  
08  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Setting  
EFFECT  
What it does  
Option(s)  
LFE  
(LFE  
Some audio sources include  
ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE –10dB/ –15dB/  
0dB/ –5dB/  
Sets the effect level for the  
currently selected Advanced  
Surround or ALC mode (each  
mode can be set separately).  
10 to 90  
Defaults:  
EXT.STEREO:  
90  
Attenuate) attenuator as necessary to  
prevent the ultra-low bass tones  
from distorting the sound from  
the speakers.  
–20dB  
OFF  
Others: 50  
H.GAIN  
(Height  
Gain)  
Adjusts the output from the front  
height speaker when listening in  
DOLBY PLIIz HEIGHT mode. If set  
to HIGH, the sound from the top  
will be more emphasized.  
LOW  
MID  
The LFE is not limited when set to  
0 dB, which is the recommended  
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,  
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is  
limited by the respective degree.  
When OFF is selected, no sound  
is output from the LFE channel.  
HIGH  
V.SB  
When you’re not using surround  
back speakers, selecting this  
mode allows you to hear a virtual  
surround back channel through  
your surround speakers. You can  
choose to listen to sources with  
no surround back channel  
information, or if the material  
sounds better in the format (for  
example, 5.1) for which it was  
originally encoded, you can have  
the receiver only apply this effect  
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby  
OFF  
(Virtual  
Surround  
Back)  
ON  
SACD  
Brings out detail in SACDs by  
maximizing the dynamic range  
(during digital processing).  
0dB  
e
GAIN  
+6 dB  
f
Specifies the routing of the HDMI  
audio signal out of this receiver  
(amp) or through to a TV. When  
THROUGH is selected, no sound  
is output from this receiver.  
AMP  
HDMI  
(HDMI  
Audio)  
THROUGH  
A. DELAY This feature automatically  
(Auto  
delay)  
OFF  
corrects the audio-to-video delay  
between components connected  
with an HDMI cable. The audio  
delay time is set depending on the  
operational status of the display  
connected with an HDMI cable.  
The video delay time is  
ON  
j
Digital EX or DTS-ES.  
V.HEIGHT When you’re not using front  
(Virtual  
Height)  
OFF  
height speakers, selecting this  
mode allows you to hear a virtual  
front height channel through your  
ON  
k
front speakers.  
automatically adjusted according  
a.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.  
b.With the iPod/USB, INTERNET RADIO or ADAPTER PORT input  
function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON.  
c.UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is  
connected. The presence or absence of effects depends on the  
listening mode.  
d.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals.  
Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.  
e.You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD  
discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting  
back to 0 dB.  
f. • The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing  
synchronized amp mode operations.  
g
to the audio delay time.  
h
Provides a better blend of the  
front speakers by spreading the  
center channel between the front  
right and left speakers, making it  
sound wider (higher settings) or  
narrower (lower settings).  
0 to 7  
C. WIDTH  
(Center  
Width)  
(Applicable  
only when  
using a  
Default: 3  
center  
speaker)  
h
Adjusts the depth of the surround  
sound balance from front to back,  
making the sound more distant  
(minus settings), or more forward  
(positive settings).  
–3 to +3  
DIMENSION  
Default: 0  
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play  
the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with  
the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized  
operations on page 58.  
g.This feature is only available when the connected display supports  
the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’) for  
HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.  
DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details  
about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer  
directly.  
h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.  
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA  
mode.  
h
Extends the front stereo image to  
include the surround speakers for  
a ‘wraparound’ effect.  
OFF  
PANORAMA  
ON  
i
Adjusts the center image to  
create a wider stereo effect with  
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0  
(all center channel sent to front  
right and left speakers) to 10  
(center channel sent to the center  
speaker only).  
0 to 10  
C. IMAGE  
(Center  
Image)  
Defaults:  
Neo:6 MUSIC:  
3
Neo:6  
CINEMA: 10  
(Applicable  
only when  
using a  
center  
speaker)  
61  
En  
Using other functions  
08  
j. • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the  
headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the  
stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or  
Stream Direct modes is selected.  
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround  
speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front Bi-Amp  
or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when  
Speaker B is selected at Speaker system and SPAB is selected  
with the SPEAKERS button.  
• When inputting Dolby True HD, DTS-HD or DTS Express audio  
signals, the Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be used if no  
surround signals are recorded in the source.  
k.• You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are  
connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front Stage  
Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is  
selected.  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
AUTO  
b
Specifies the output resolution of  
the video signal (when video input  
signals are output at the HDMI  
OUT connector, select this  
according to the resolution of your  
monitor and the images you wish  
to watch).  
RES  
(Resolution)  
PURE  
480p/576p  
720p  
1080i  
1080p  
1080/24p  
THROUGH  
NORMAL  
c
Specifies the aspect ratio when  
input signals are output at the  
HDMI output. Make your desired  
settings while checking each  
setting on your display (if the  
image doesn’t match your monitor  
type, cropping or black bands  
appear).  
ASP  
(Aspect)  
• The Virtual Height mode cannot be used when no surround  
speaker is connected. It can also not be used when playing signals  
containing actual front height channel information.  
• When inputting certain Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD or DTS Express  
audio signals, the Virtual Height mode cannot be used if no  
surround signals are recorded in the source.  
d,e  
This setting optimizes the  
AUTO  
ON  
PCINEMA  
(PureCinema)  
operation of the progressive  
scanning circuit for playing film  
materials. Normally set it to AUTO.  
If the picture seems unnatural,  
switch this to ON or OFF.  
OFF  
Setting the Video options  
There are a number of additional picture settings you can  
make using the VIDEO PARAMETERmenu. The defaults,  
if not stated, are listed in bold.  
d,e  
Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to  
progressive.  
–4 to +4  
P.MOTION  
(Progressive  
Motion)  
Default: 0  
Important  
d
Reduces noise in the luminance  
(Y) signal.  
0 to +8  
Default: 0  
0 to +8  
YNR  
• Note that if an option cannot be selected on the  
VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to  
the current source, setting and status of the receiver.  
d
Reduces noise in the input’s color  
(C) signal.  
CNR  
Default: 0  
0 to +8  
• All of the setting items can be set for each input  
function.  
d
Reduces block noise (block-  
shaped distortion generated upon  
MPEG compression) in the  
picture.  
BNR  
Default: 0  
• Setting items other than V. CONV can only be  
selected when V. CONV is set to ON.  
d
Reduces mosquito noise  
(distortion generated at the  
contours of the picture upon  
MPEG compression) in the  
picture.  
0 to +8  
RECEIVER  
VIDEO PARAMETER  
MNR  
1
Press  
on the remote control, then press  
.
Default: 0  
2
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.  
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
d
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
0 to +8  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
DETAIL  
d
Adjusts the overall brightness.  
BRIGHT  
(Brightness)  
3
Use / to set as necessary.  
See the table below for the options available for each  
d
setting.  
Adjusts the contrast between light  
and dark.  
CONTRAST  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
d
Adjusts the red/green balance.  
HUE  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
a
Converts video signals for output  
from the MONITOR OUT jacks  
(including HDMI OUT connector)  
for all video types (see page 22).  
ON  
V. CONV  
d
Adjusts saturation from dull to  
bright.  
CHROMA  
(Chroma  
Level)  
(DigitalVideo  
Conversion)  
OFF  
f
Corrects the black depth in the  
brightness signal.  
7.5  
BLK SETUP  
0
Normally select 7.5. If the dark  
parts of the picture are all black  
with this setting, select 0.  
62  
En  
Using other functions  
08  
a.If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON,  
switch it OFF.  
b.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not  
compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will  
be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change  
the setting.  
• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically  
according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI.  
When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same  
resolution as when input (see About the video converter on page 22).  
• If this is set to something other than AUTO, PURE and 480i/576i  
analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals are output from the  
component output terminals.  
Switching the speaker terminals  
If you selected Speaker B at Speaker system setting on  
page 85, you can switch between speakers using the  
SPEAKERS button. If you selected Normal(SB/FH),  
Normal(SB/FW), Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button  
will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off.  
1
The options below are for the Speaker B setting only.  
Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a  
speaker system setting.  
• When 1080/24p is selected, depending on the source material the  
movement may be unnatural or the picture may not be clear. In this  
case, set the resolution to something other than 1080/24p.  
• 1080/24p is mainly effective for movie source materials.  
c.• If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect  
ratio on the source component or on the monitor.  
• This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals  
are being input.  
d.This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are  
being input:  
• 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals  
• 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video  
signals  
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal(SB/  
FH) or Normal(SB/FW), the button will simply switch  
your main speaker terminal (A) on or off.  
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option:  
SPA – Sound is output from the A-speaker  
terminals (up to 7 channels (including surround back  
channels), depending on the source).  
SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers  
connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel  
sources will not be heard.  
e.• This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output.  
• This setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the  
interlaced scan format (480i/576i or 1080i signals).  
P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON.  
f. You can’t use this setting when the HDMI or component video  
signals are being input.  
SPAB – Sound is output from the A-speaker  
terminals (up to 5 channels, depending on the  
source), the two speakers connected to the B-  
speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound  
from the B-speaker terminals will be the same as the  
sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel  
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).  
SP(off) – No sound is output from the speakers.  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls  
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust  
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-  
ZONE remote controls on page 64.  
1
Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.  
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:  
ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub  
zone  
ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones  
ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub  
zone  
MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE  
feature off  
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE  
control has been switched ON.  
2
Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to  
select the sub zone(s) you want.  
If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle  
between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.  
Note  
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 84. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound  
is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).  
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.  
63  
En  
Using other functions  
08  
1
• When the receiver is on, make sure that any  
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and  
your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this  
is not showing, the front panel controls affect the  
main zone only.  
Making an audio or a video recording  
You can make an audio or a video recording from the  
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source  
4
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).  
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source  
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an  
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the  
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in  
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 16 for more on connections).  
for the zone you have selected.  
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected  
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.  
• If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner controls  
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets  
on page 46 if you’re unsure how to do this).  
Since the video converter is not available when making  
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use  
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder  
as you used to connect your video source (the one you  
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must  
connect your recorder using Component video if your  
source has also been connected using Component video.  
2
4
When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2, use the  
MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub  
zone.  
5
When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE  
CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.  
1
Select the source you want to record.  
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front  
3
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT SELECT).  
panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).  
2
Prepare the source you want to record.  
MULTI-ZONE remote controls  
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.  
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE  
3 to operate the corresponding zone.  
3
Select the input signal according to the signal to be  
recorded.  
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE  
remote controls:  
Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.  
4
Prepare the recorder.  
Button  
What it does  
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording  
device and set the recording levels. Refer to the  
instructions that came with the recorder if you are  
unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio  
recording level automatically—check the component’s  
instruction manual if you’re unsure.  
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.  
INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function in the sub  
zone.  
Input function Use to select the input function directly (this  
buttons  
may not work for some functions) in the sub  
zone.  
5
Start recording, then start playback of the source  
MASTER  
VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume in the sub  
component.  
a
zone.  
MUTE  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has  
been muted (adjusting the volume also  
restores the sound).a  
Reducing the level of an analog signal  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog  
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find  
that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear  
a.You can only use this button when Speaker System is set to ZONE 2  
.
5
distortion in the sound.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
Press  
A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.  
Note  
1 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.  
2 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other  
zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.  
3 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.  
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in  
standby.  
4 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.  
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.  
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.  
5 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.  
64  
En  
Using other functions  
Using the sleep timer  
08  
Using the Web Control function  
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a  
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without  
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use  
the remote control to set the sleep timer.  
The receiver can be operated using a browser from a  
computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver.  
1
Turn on the computer and launch the Internet  
browser.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.  
Press  
2
In the address bar on the browser, enter the IP  
address assigned to this receiver.  
For example, if the IP address of this receiver is  
“192.168.0.2”, enter “http://192.168.0.2/”.  
30 min  
Off  
60 min  
90 min  
When the connection is made with the receiver, a Top  
Menu will be displayed.  
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time  
This receiver’s IP address can be found in the ‘IP address,  
Proxy’ menu (page 87).  
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will  
1
cycle through the sleep options again.  
3
Once the Top Menu is displayed, click the button for  
the zone you want to operate.  
Dimming the display  
4
Operate from the screen for the individual zone.  
• Even when the receiver is in the standby mode, it can  
be turned on using the Web Control function. For  
details, see Network Standby on page 88.  
You can choose between four brightness levels for the  
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the  
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
Press  
Top Menu  
DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the  
front panel display.  
Web Control  
Main ZONE  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
VOLUME  
-60.0dB  
MUTE  
INPUT SELECT  
DVD  
Switching the HDMI output  
LISTENING MODE STEREO  
AUTO SURR/ALC/  
STREAM DIRECT  
HOME  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
Set which terminal to use when outputting video and  
STEREO  
audio signals from the HDMI output terminals.  
The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the Control  
with HDMI function.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
.
Press  
HDMI OUT  
Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed.  
The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL HDMI OUT  
Checking your system settings  
Use the status display screen to check your current  
settings for features such as surround back channel  
processing and your current MCACC preset.  
,
2
1 and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
1
Press  
STATUS to check the system settings.  
The front panel display shows each of the following  
settings for three seconds each: Input function,  
Sampling Frequency, MCACC preset, ZONE 2 input,  
ZONE 3 input and HDMI OUT.  
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to  
switch off the display.  
Note  
1 The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.  
2 • The synchronized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch to HDMI  
OUT 1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the TV using the TV’s remote control.  
• When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output, the input is set to a setting between HDMI 1 and HDMI 4, or BD.  
65  
En  
Using other functions  
Resetting the system  
08  
Setting  
Default  
DSP  
Power On Level  
Volume Limit  
Mute Level  
Phase Control  
Sound Retriever  
LAST  
OFF  
FULL  
ON  
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to  
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.  
Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF.  
• Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from  
the receiver beforehand.  
iPod/USB, INTERNET  
RADIO, ADAPTER  
PORT function  
ON  
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.  
Other functions  
OFF  
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,  
press STANDBY/ON  
The display shows RESET NO .  
.
Sound Delay  
Dual Mono  
DRC  
0.0 frame  
CH1  
AUTO  
3
Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET /, then press  
SACD Gain  
LFE Attenuate  
Auto delay  
Digital Safety  
Effect Level  
0 dB  
ENTER on the front panel.  
The display shows RESET? OK.  
0 dB  
OFF  
4
Press ENTER to confirm.  
OFF  
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver  
has been reset to the factory default settings.  
ExtendedStereo  
Other modes  
Center Width  
Dimension  
90  
50  
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the  
receiver is unplugged.  
2 PL II Music  
Options  
3
0
Default system settings  
Panorama  
OFF  
Neo:6 Options  
Center Image  
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3  
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10  
Setting  
Default  
ON  
Digital Video Conversion  
SPEAKERS  
All Inputs  
Listening Mode  
(2 ch/multi ch)  
AUTO  
SURROUND  
A
Speaker System  
Normal (SB/FH)  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALLx2  
YES  
Listening Mode (HP) STEREO  
Speaker Setting  
Front  
See also Setting the Audio options on page 60 for other default  
DSP settings.  
Center  
FH/FW  
Surr  
MCACC  
MCACC Position Memory  
Channel Level (M1 to M6)  
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)  
M1: MEMORY 1  
0.0 dB  
SB  
SW  
10.00 ft  
Surround Position  
Crossover  
IN REAR  
80 Hz  
Standing Wave  
(M1 to M6)  
ATT of all channels/ 0.0 dB  
filters  
X-Curve  
OFF  
SWch Wide Trim  
0.0 dB  
THX Audio Setting  
DIMMER  
4 ft<  
EQ Data (M1 to M6)  
All channels/bands 0.0 dB  
EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB  
Brightest  
OFF  
Network Standby  
Inputs  
See Input function default and possible settings on page 41.  
HDMI  
HDMI Audio  
HDMI output  
Control  
Amp  
HDMI OUT ALL  
ON  
ALL  
YES  
Control Mode  
DIsplay Power Off  
66  
En  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Chapter 9:  
Controlling the rest of your system  
Setting  
What it does  
About the Remote Setup menu  
Change RC If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers,  
mode  
etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units  
from operating simultaneously when the remote  
control unit is operated. See “Operating multiple  
receivers” on page 67.  
The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number  
button while pressing R.SETUP. The different items on  
the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their  
setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the  
respective items.  
Note  
Setting  
What it does  
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing  
R.SETUP.  
Preset  
recall  
Preset codes can be set for the various input  
functions. The remote control codes of a number  
of other devices (including products of other  
brands) are preset in the remote control to allow  
these devices to be operated. See “Selecting  
preset codes directly” on page 68.  
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote  
automatically exits the operation.  
Code  
learning  
If the desired operations cannot be performed  
even though you have set the preset codes, the  
remote control signals of other devices can be  
learned directly. See “Programming signals from  
other remote controls” on page 68.  
Operating multiple receivers  
Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this  
receiver's remote control when using multiple receivers,  
provided they are of the same model as this receiver. The  
receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the  
preset code to set the remote control setting.  
Multi  
A series of the remote control operations for  
operation starting listening or viewing can be programmed.  
Multiple remote control codes can be set for the  
different input functions. See “Multi operation and  
System off” on page 70.  
• Set the remote modes on the receivers before using  
this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on  
page 89).  
System off This is a function for automatically turning off the  
power of devices connected to the receiver.  
Multiple remote control codes can be set, as  
desired. See “Multi operation and System off” on  
page 70.  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “4” for three  
seconds.  
The LED flashes continuously.  
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
Direct  
function  
This is a setting for changing only the remote  
control unit’s operation screen, without changing  
the receiver’s input, when the remote control  
unit’s input function buttons are pressed. This is  
convenient for using the remote control unit for  
devices not connected to the receiver. See “Direct  
function” on page 69.  
2
1
Press the number button for the receiver (“Receiver  
” to “Receiver 4”) you wish to operate.  
For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press “2”.  
If the LED lights for one second, the setting has been  
successfully completed.  
When the preset code is input, the LED flashes three  
times to indicate that the setting has failed.  
Erase  
learning  
This function is used to erase remote control  
codes that have been learned. Codes learned for  
the different input functions can be erased  
individually. See “Erasing one of the remote  
control button settings” on page 69.  
Back light The backlight lighting pattern can be selected  
from among four modes, in consideration of  
convenience and battery service life. See “Setting  
the backlight mode” on page 70.  
Reset  
function  
This is a function for resetting preset codes that  
have been set. Key resetting can be done for  
individual input functions. See “Erasing all learnt  
settings that are in one input function” on page 69.  
All reset  
This is a function for resetting all remote control  
unit settings you have made to the defaults set  
upon shipment from the factory. See “Resetting  
the remote control settings” on page 72.  
67  
En  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
If the LED lights for one second, the setting has been  
successfully completed.  
Setting the remote to control other  
components  
When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes three  
times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this  
happens, enter the 4-digit preset code again.  
Most components can be assigned to one of the input  
function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the  
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the  
remote.  
4
Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components  
you want to control.  
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or  
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t  
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there  
is one).  
However, there are cases where only certain functions  
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset  
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote  
control will not work for the model that you are using.  
5
Press R.SETUP to exit the preset setup mode.  
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the  
component you want to control, you can still teach the  
remote individual commands from another remote  
control (see Programming signals from other remote  
controls on page 68).  
Programming signals from other  
remote controls  
• For greater convenience, assign the TV connected to  
the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV CTRL button,  
and assign your satellite/cable receiver or set-top box  
connected to the TV input terminal to the TV input  
button. If a single device is connected to both  
terminals, that device should be assigned to both the  
TV CTRL and TV input buttons.  
If the preset code for your component is not available, or  
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you  
can program signals from the remote control of another  
component. This can also be used to program additional  
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after  
1
assigning a preset code.  
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be  
learned from other remote controls. The buttons  
available are shown below:  
• Devices may be assigned to the following input  
function buttons.  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
OPERATION  
LIST TUNE TOOLS  
R.SETUP  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
BD  
TV  
DVD DVR/BDR HDMI  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
CD NET RADIO ADAPTER  
MULTI  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
OPERATION  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS  
INPUT SELECT TV CTRL  
XM  
R.SETUP  
HOME  
MENU  
iPod CTRL  
BD  
TV  
DVD DVR/BDR HDMI  
RECEIVER  
AUTO /ALC  
/
PGM MEMORY MENU  
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
CD NET RADIO ADAPTER  
HDD  
THX  
DVD  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
AUDIO  
iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS  
INPUT SELECT TV CTRL  
XM  
TV  
/
DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
RECEIVER  
Selecting preset codes directly  
HDMI OUT  
2
1
3
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP  
INFO  
DISP  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “1” for three  
4
5
6
TV CONTROL  
seconds.  
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER  
7
8
9
The LED flashes continuously.  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
CH  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/
CLR  
0
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
2
Press the input function button for the component  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “2” for three  
you want to control.  
seconds.  
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV  
The LED flashes continuously.  
CTRL here.  
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.  
2
Press the input function button for the component  
3
Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit preset  
you want to control.  
code.  
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.  
See Preset code list on page 107.  
Note  
1 The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).  
68  
En  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
3
Point the two remote controls towards each other,  
then press the button that will be doing the learning on  
this receiver’s remote control.  
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.  
Erasing all learnt settings that are in  
one input function  
This operation erases all the operational settings of other  
devices that have been programmed in one input  
function, and restores the factory default.  
• The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch) apart.  
This function is handy for erasing all data programmed  
for devices no longer being used.  
3 cm  
(1 inch)  
Other remote  
control  
This receiver’s  
remote control  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “9” for three  
seconds.  
The LED flashes continuously.  
4
Press the corresponding button on the other remote  
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this  
receiver’s remote control.  
If the LED lights for one second, the setting has been  
2
Press and hold the input function button  
corresponding to the command to be erased for three  
seconds.  
1
successfully completed.  
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been  
successfully completed.  
5
To program additional signals for the current  
component repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To program signals for another component, exit and  
repeat steps 2 through 4.  
Direct function  
6
Press R.SETUP to exit the programming mode.  
• Default setting: On  
You can use the direct function feature to control one  
component using the remote control while at the same  
time using your receiver to play a different component.  
This could let you, for example, use the remote control to  
set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then use the  
remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you  
continue to listen to your CD player.  
Erasing one of the remote control  
button settings  
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and  
restores the button to the factory default.  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “7” for three  
When direct function is on, any component you select  
(using the input function buttons) will be selected by both  
the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct  
function off, you can operate the remote control without  
affecting the receiver.  
seconds.  
The LED flashes continuously.  
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
2
Press the input function button corresponding to  
the command to be erased, then press ENTER  
The LED flashes once.  
.
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “5” for three  
seconds.  
The LED flashes continuously.  
3
Press and hold the button to be erased for three  
seconds.  
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been  
successfully completed.  
2
Press the input function button for the component  
you want to control.  
4
5
Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.  
Press R.SETUP to exit the erasing mode.  
3
Press “1” (On) or “0” (Off) to switch the direct  
function mode.  
If the LED lights for one second, the setting has been  
successfully completed.  
If the LED flashes three times, the setting has failed.  
4
Press R.SETUP to exit the setup.  
Note  
1 • Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.  
• Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or  
farther apart.  
• If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 69 to  
erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).  
69  
En  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Setting the backlight mode  
Multi operation and System off  
• Default setting: 1 (normal mode)  
The Multi operation feature allows you to program a  
series of up to 5 commands for the components in your  
system.  
The backlight lighting pattern can be selected from  
among four modes, in consideration of convenience and  
battery service life.  
Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices or  
perform programming signals for other remote  
controls before multi operation memory  
programming (page 68).  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “6” for three  
seconds.  
The LED flashes continuously.  
The Multi operation feature makes it easy to perform the  
following operations by pressing just two buttons.  
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
2
Press the number button for the backlight mode  
Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD input  
function button to:  
you want to set.  
“1” (normal mode) – The backlight is turned on and  
off with the light button. After it lights, it turns off  
automatically if no operation is performed for 10  
seconds.  
1. Switch this receiver on.  
2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD.  
3. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed  
commands.  
“2” (frequent lighting mode – The backlight turns  
)
Similar to Multi operations, System off allows you to use  
two buttons to stop and switch off a series of components  
in your system at the same time. Only one System off  
operation sequence may be programmed.  
on when any button on the remote control is pressed.  
It is turned off with the light button. After it lights, it  
turns off automatically if no operation is performed  
for 10 seconds.  
1
Press MULTI OPERATION and then SOURCE to:  
“3” (eco mode) – The backlight is turned on and off  
with the light button. After it lights, it turns off  
automatically if no operation is performed for 5  
seconds.  
1. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed  
commands.  
2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the receiver  
(except DVD recorders and VCRs).  
“4” (off mode) – The backlight does not turn on even  
when the light button is pressed.  
For greater convenience, program this receiver to  
perform power on/off and playback operations on non-  
If the LED lights for one second, the setting has been  
successfully completed.  
2
Pioneer devices as well. (The signals for Pioneer devices  
described above are not contingent on programming for  
non-Pioneer devices.)  
If the LED flashes three, the setting has failed.  
The buttons that can be programmed using Multi  
operation or System off are the same buttons as those  
that can be programmed for other remote controls (see  
Programming signals from other remote controls on  
page 68).  
3
Press R.SETUP to exit the setup.  
Note  
1 • Before Multi operation and System off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting  
the remote to control other components on page 68 for more on this).  
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.  
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.  
2 Some remote controllers for other manufacturers' devices use the same signals for switching the power on and off. In some cases, even if this  
receiver is programmed to perform these commands, power to the non-Pioneer devices may not be switched on and off correctly. Program  
the receiver to perform these commands if the non-Pioneer device uses separate signals for power on/off.  
70  
En  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Programming a Multi operation or a  
shutdown sequence  
Using System off  
Press MULTI OPERATION  
1
.
The LED flashes continuously.  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “3” for three  
seconds.  
The LED flashes continuously.  
2
Within five seconds, press SOURCE  
.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then  
all Pioneer components will switch off , followed by this  
2
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
receiver (switch of all the zones becomes off).  
2
Press the input function button (or SOURCE  
button).  
Erasing the settings for the multi-operation  
This erases all the settings programmed in the remote  
control for the multi-operation.  
For Multi operations, press the input function you wish to  
program (for example, if you want to start the sequence  
1
by switching on your DVD player, press DVD).  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “8” for three  
For System off, press the SOURCE button.  
seconds.  
The LED flashes continuously.  
The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously.  
• To cancel the preset setup mode press R.SETUP.  
3
If necessary, press the input function button for the  
component whose command you want to input.  
This is only necessary if the command is for a new  
component (input function).  
2
Press the input function button containing the  
program you want to cancel or the SOURCE button  
for three seconds.  
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been  
successfully completed.  
4
Select the button for the command you want to  
input.  
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.  
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on  
or off. This is done automatically.  
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to program  
the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except  
DVD recorders).  
5
Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a sequence of up to  
five commands.  
If you press R.SETUP before programming is completed,  
commands programmed up to that point will be stored.  
6
Press R.SETUP to exit the programming mode.  
Using multi operations  
Press MULTI OPERATION  
1
.
The LED flashes continuously.  
2
Within five seconds, press an input function  
button that has been set up with a multi operation.  
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the  
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.  
Note  
1 With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL settings cannot be made. For other settable input functions, see Setting the remote to control  
other components on page 68.  
2 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.  
71  
En  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Resetting the remote control settings  
Controlling components  
Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s  
This remote control can control components after  
entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to  
control other components on page 68 for more on this).  
Use the input function buttons to select the component.  
1
settings to the factory default.  
1
Press and hold R.SETUP, then press “0” for three  
seconds.  
The LED flashes continuously.  
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are  
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the  
TV CTRL button.  
2
Press and hold the ENTER button for three seconds.  
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been  
successfully completed.  
MULTI  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
OPERATION  
Default preset codes  
R.SETUP  
Input function button Preset code  
BD  
TV  
DVD DVR/BDR HDMI  
DVD  
2 1 5 8  
2 1 6 0  
2 1 5 0  
2 1 5 9  
0 1 1 6  
5 0 6 6  
0 1 1 6  
CD NET RADIO ADAPTER  
BD  
iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS  
INPUT SELECT TV CTRL  
XM  
DVR/BDR  
HDMI  
TV  
RECEIVER  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
CD  
TV CONTROL  
TV CTRL  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
LIST TUNE TOOLS  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
HOME  
TUNE  
MENU  
iPod CTRL  
AUTO /ALC  
/
PGM MEMORY MENU  
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
TV  
/
DTV  
MPX  
PQLS  
HDMI OUT  
2
AUDIO  
1
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP  
INFO  
DISP  
4
5
6
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER  
7
8
9
CH  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/
CLR  
0
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
LIGHT  
RECEIVER  
Note  
1 When preset codes are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset  
some but not all of input function buttons.  
72  
En  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Button(s)  
TV  
TV (Monitor)  
BD/DVD  
HDD/DVR  
VCR  
SAT/CATV  
SOURCE  
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF  
Number buttons numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
CLEAR  
numerics  
+
numerics  
numerics  
(dot)  
(dot)  
KURO LINK  
CH ENTER  
-
-
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
(CLASS)  
EXIT/INFO  
EXIT  
TOP MENU  
TOOLS  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
-
-
LIST  
TOOLS/GUIDE/  
EPG  
USER MENU  
GUIDE  
///  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
-
-
-
///  
ENTER  
ENTER  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME / MENU  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RETURN  
-
RETURN  
HDD (Red)  
DVD (Green)  
(Yellow)  
(Blue)  
Red  
Red  
-
HDD  
DVD  
VCR  
MENU  
-
Red  
Green  
Green  
-
-
Green  
Yellow  
Blue  
Yellow  
Yellow  
-
-
Blue  
Blue  
MENU  
-
-
-
-
AUTO SETUP  
FREEZE  
-
-
-
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
-
-
ANT  
-
AV SELECTION  
SCREEN SIZE  
AUDIO  
-
-
AUDIO  
DISP  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH+/  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH+/  
AUDIO  
-
AUDIO  
DISPLAY/INFO  
CH+/  
DISPLAY  
CH+/  
CH +/–  
OUTPUT  
CH+/  
RESOLUTION  
a
+/  
a. Controls for BD.  
73  
En  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Button(s)  
LD  
CD/CD-R/SACD  
MD/DAT  
TAPE  
Button(s)  
TV (Projector)  
POWER ON  
MOVIE  
SOURCE  
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF  
SOURCE  
Number buttons numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
-
1
b
(dot)  
+10  
>10/CLEAR  
DISC/ENTER  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
2
STANDARD  
DYNAMIC  
USER1  
b
ENTER  
(CLASS)  
ENTER  
OPEN/CLOSE  
3
4
TOP MENU  
-
-
-
-
MS  
5
USER2  
6
USER3  
a
MS  
LEGATO LINK  
7
COLOR+  
SHARP+  
GAMMA  
COLOR  
///  
///  
-
-
-
-
///  
8
ENTER  
ENTER  
-
-
-
9
a
SACD SETUP  
-
0
(dot)  
SHARP  
RETURN  
-
-
-
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP  
EXIT  
INFO  
AUDIO  
DISP  
-
-
///  
///  
ENTER  
ENTER  
TEST  
a
AUDIO  
DISPLAY/INFO  
PURE AUDIO  
HIDE  
a
TIME  
-
-
MENU  
a. Controls for SACD.  
b. Controls for MD.  
HDMI1  
HDMI2  
COMP.  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
BRIGHT  
BRIGHT+  
POWER OFF  
ASPECT  
CONTRAST+/  
AUDIO  
DISP  
CH +/–  
74  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
Chapter 10:  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Making receiver settings from the  
Advanced MCACC menu  
Automatic MCACC (Expert)  
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those  
provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound  
tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38, you can customize  
your setup options below. You can calibrate your system  
differently for up to six different MCACC presets, which  
are useful if you have different listening positions  
depending on the type of source (for example, watching  
movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the  
TV).  
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic  
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s  
laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home  
users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a  
studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic  
characteristics of the listening environment are  
measured and the frequency response is calibrated  
accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis  
and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it  
closer to a studio environment than ever before.  
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate  
standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing  
wave control function using a unique process to perform  
acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.  
Important  
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved  
during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
• The screen saver will automatically appear after five  
minutes of inactivity.  
This section describes how to calibrate the sound field  
automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data  
manually.  
CAUTION  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
®
2
Press  
THX  
HOME MENU  
.
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered  
in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC  
menu, then press ENTER  
.
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home  
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to  
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu  
above.  
Menu.  
3
Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the Home Menu  
then press ENTER  
,
.
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically conducting  
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38  
for a quick and effective automatic surround setup.  
Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert)  
below for a more detailed MCACC setup.  
Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings  
and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see  
Manual MCACC setup on page 77).  
Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur.  
When the speakers are connected to this receiver,  
the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to  
cancel the test tone.  
75  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
2
Select the parameters you want to set.  
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
Use / to select the item, then use / to set.  
Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended),  
jack on the front panel.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
but you can limit the system calibration to only one  
1
setting (to save time) if you want.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
MULTI-ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC  
Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines  
how the frequency balance is adjusted.  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI  
5
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
After a single calibration is performed, each of the  
following three correction curves can be stored  
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY  
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left  
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude  
characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all  
the speakers are set individually so no special weighting  
Microphone  
Tripod  
2
is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all  
speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings  
(no equalization is applied to the front left and right  
channels).  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you  
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the  
3
THX Speaker (only available when the Auto MCACC  
Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES  
if you are using THX speakers (set all speakers to  
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.  
microphone.  
4
When you’re finished setting the options, select  
START then press ENTER  
.
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the  
Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In  
addition to measurements at the listening position,  
you can use two more reference points for which test  
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is  
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration  
for several seating positions in your listening area.  
Place the microphone at the reference point  
indicated on-screen and note that the last  
5
6
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish  
outputting test tones.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
4
it’s doing this.  
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient  
noise! or Check microphone) select RETRY after  
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40) and  
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to  
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
microphone placement will be at your main listening  
position:  
2nd reference  
3rd reference  
point  
point  
1
2
7
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in  
the GUI screen.  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
3
Main listening  
position  
Note  
1 • When data measurement is taken (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-  
calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten. If you want to save the reverb characteristics data before measuring,  
connect a USB memory device to this receiver and transfer the data.  
• When measurement is taken of data other than SYMMETRY (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the data are not measured after the  
correction. If you will need to measure after correction data, take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC  
setup (page 77).  
• The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional on page 79 for more on this.  
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For  
details, see Setting the Audio options on page 60.  
2 If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the  
SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.  
3 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.  
4 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
76  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the  
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,  
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this  
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in  
step 8.  
Manual MCACC setup  
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup  
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more  
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,  
you should have already completed Automatically  
conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on  
page 38.  
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker  
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a  
problem with the speaker connection.  
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power  
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t  
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to  
select the speaker and / to change the setting  
and continue.  
You only need to make these settings once (unless you  
change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers).  
CAUTION  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring  
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker  
connections.  
• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are  
output at high volume.  
1
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,  
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.  
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure  
again.  
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
Important  
• Press the MCACC button while the pertinent setup  
screens are displayed to select MCACC presets.  
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect  
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it  
about ear level at your normal listening position.  
Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu  
before you connect the microphone to this receiver.  
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings.  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 40 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.  
• If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup  
(in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the  
2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it  
at your main listening position.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up  
the volume to the middle position.  
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced  
MCACC menu.  
9
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and  
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC  
menu on page 75 if you’re not already at this screen.  
the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to  
make these settings in order.  
2
SP Setup menu (starting on page 84).  
Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the  
overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine  
Channel Level on page 78).  
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting  
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check  
screen (see Checking MCACC Data on page 81).  
Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for  
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on  
page 78).  
Press RETURN after you have finished checking each  
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back  
to the Home Menu.  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver  
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Note  
1 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective  
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.  
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with  
different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 84.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking  
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend  
adjusting the settings manually.  
77  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low  
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing  
Wave on page 78).  
Fine Speaker Distance  
• Default setting: 10’00” (all speakers)  
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,  
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some  
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening  
position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of  
each speaker in half inch increments. The following  
setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you  
may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on  
page 84.  
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the  
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust  
on page 79:  
EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance  
of your speaker system while listening to test tones  
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 79).  
EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on  
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make  
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb  
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional on page 79).  
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC  
setup menu.  
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the  
listening position.  
Fine Channel Level  
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance  
as necessary.  
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected  
You can achieve better surround sound by properly  
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You  
can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB  
increments. The following setting can help you make  
detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the  
Manual speaker setup on page 84.  
to match the reference speaker.  
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the  
target channel. From the listening position, face the two  
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each  
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are  
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of  
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual  
1
you and between your arm span.  
MCACC setup menu.  
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.  
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.  
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want  
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty  
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.  
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,  
press to confirm and continue to the next channel.  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/  
–12.0 dB) as necessary.  
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you  
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds  
like both tones are the same volume, press to confirm  
and continue to the next channel.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use / to select it.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Standing Wave  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use / to select it.  
2
• Default setting: ON /ATT 0.0dB (all filters)  
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain  
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system  
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the  
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative  
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower  
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your  
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Note  
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.  
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be  
difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).  
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio  
options on page 60 for more on this.  
78  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The  
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of  
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During  
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used  
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC  
Tip  
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too  
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker  
balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel  
levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use /  
to select TRIM, then use / to raise or lower the  
channel level for the current speaker.  
1
presets.  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC  
setup menu.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
2
Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Control.  
Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will  
apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel  
and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room  
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers.  
TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is  
SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to  
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).  
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant  
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that  
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb  
characteristics (when Type A or Type B shown on the  
diagrams on the following applies), select EQ Pro. & S-  
Wave (or ALL) for the Auto MCACC setting in Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 75 to calibrate the room  
automatically.  
Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where  
Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting  
and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the  
narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation  
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted  
frequency).  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust  
• Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/bands)  
Low  
Level  
frequencies  
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room  
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It  
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your  
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that  
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’  
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the  
adjustment provided in Automatically conducting  
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38 or  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 75, you can also  
adjust these settings manually to get a frequency  
balance that suits your tastes.  
High  
frequencies  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
calibration range  
Time  
(in msec)  
0
80  
160  
Type B: Reverb characteristics for different  
channels  
Front L  
Level  
Front R  
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
ConventionalMCACC  
calibration range  
EQ calibration range  
2
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your  
Time  
liking.  
0
80  
160  
(in msec)  
Use / to select the channel.  
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or  
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of  
the screen and press to return to Ch, then use / to  
select the channel.  
If the pattern is as shown above, select the 30-50ms  
setting. If not, this setting is not necessary.  
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the  
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might  
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until  
OVER! disappears from the display.  
Note  
1 Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.  
79  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the  
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN  
when you’re done.  
1
2
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER  
Select an option and press ENTER  
Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the  
reverb characteristics before and after calibration.  
.
The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full  
Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements  
.
4
are conducted.  
Use / to select the channel, frequency and  
calibration setting you want to check. Use / to go  
back and forth between the three. The reverb  
characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can  
be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After.  
Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate  
decibels in 2 dB steps.  
Reverb View – You can check the reverb  
measurements made for specified frequency ranges  
1
in each channel.  
Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time  
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and  
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of  
your listening area. Note that customizing system  
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you  
made in Automatically conducting optimum sound  
tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 75 and is not necessary if  
you’re satisfied with these settings.  
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the  
MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired  
time setting for calibration, and then select START 5  
.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can  
choose the time period that will be used for the final  
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you  
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is  
best to use the measurement results as a reference for  
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we  
recommend using the 30-50ms setting.  
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ  
ON or OFF, and then START  
.
The following options determine how the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in  
Reverb View:  
EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area without the equalization  
performed by this receiver (before calibration).  
Use / to select the setting. Use / to switch  
between them.  
Select the setting from the following time periods (in  
milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, 20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-  
60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied  
to all channels during calibration.  
EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area with the equalization performed  
2
by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ  
response may not appear entirely flat due to  
adjustments necessary for your listening area.  
3
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2  
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.  
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select  
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 96  
for troubleshooting information.  
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are  
given the option to check the settings on-screen.  
Note  
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38 or  
Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto  
MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the  
characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations  
without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish  
to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement  
function.  
2 • The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset,  
press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.  
• The predicted reverb characteristics after calibration can be acquired with the Full Auto MCACC function (Automatically conducting  
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38), but here the actually measured reverb characteristics after calibration can be acquired.  
3 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed  
by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.  
4 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC (ALL or KEEP SP system) function  
shows the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.  
5 To specify the place where the MCACC memory is to be stored, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.  
80  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Checking MCACC Data  
10  
Channel Level  
Use this to display the level of the various channels. See  
Channel Level on page 86 for more on this.  
At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum  
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38, the  
procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 75 or  
after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 77,  
you can check your calibrated settings using the GUI  
screen. The data can be transferred to a computer using  
a USB device to check it on the computer’s screen as  
well.  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select  
the MCACC preset you want to check.  
The level of the various channels set at the selected  
MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels  
that are not connected.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
1
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
Speaker Distance  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
Use this to display the distance from the different  
channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance  
on page 86 for more on this.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data  
2
3
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Home Menu  
.
Check menu.  
Select the setting you want to check.  
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select  
Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the  
speaker systems. See Speaker Setting on page 81 for  
more on this.  
the MCACC preset you want to check.  
The distance from the various channels set at the  
selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for  
channels that are not connected.  
Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the  
different speakers. See Channel Level on page 81 for  
more on this.  
Standing Wave  
Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to  
the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on  
page 81 for more on this.  
Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment  
values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing  
Wave on page 78 for more on this.  
Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave  
control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 81  
for more on this.  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
2
When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use / to  
Acoustic Cal EQ Used to check the calibration  
values of the listening environment’s frequency  
response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 81 for more on  
this.  
select the channel for which you want to check  
standing wave control.  
The standing wave related calibration value for the  
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset  
and its graph are displayed.  
Output MCACC data – See Output MCACC data on  
page 82 for more on this.  
3
Press  
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to  
4
Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data  
Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other  
settings.  
select the MCACC preset you want to check.  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
Use this to display the calibration values for the  
frequency response of the various channels set in the  
different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Adjust on page 79 for more on this.  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Home Menu.  
Speaker Setting  
Use this to display the speaker size and number of  
speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 85 for more on this.  
1
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data  
2
When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use / to select the  
Check menu.  
channel.  
The calibration value for the frequency response of the  
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset  
and its graph are displayed.  
2
Select the channel you want to check.  
Use / to select the channel. The corresponding  
channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.  
81  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
3
Press  
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to  
select the MCACC preset you want to check.  
Data Management  
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,  
allowing you to calibrate your system for different  
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the  
Output MCACC data  
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 2  
in Checking MCACC Data on page 81. The data measured  
with the Advanced MCACC function is transmitted to the  
3
same listening position). This is useful for alternate  
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to  
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies  
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).  
1
USB device. The 3D graphs of the reverb characteristics  
before and after calibration and the MCACC results  
(parameters) can be checked on your computer.  
From this menu you can copy from one preset to another,  
name presets for easier identification and clear any ones  
you don’t need.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
1
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
2
3
Select ‘Data Management’ from the Home Menu.  
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for  
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets  
below).  
1
Select ‘Output MCACC data’ from the MCACC  
Data Check menu.  
When the receiver is ready for transmission, “Please  
connect your USB memory for the MCACC data, then  
press OK to output them.” shows on the GUI screen.  
MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one  
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC  
preset data on page 83).  
2
Connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the  
MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets  
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on  
page 83).  
front panel, then select “OK”.  
“Please wait...” will be displayed on the screen and  
transmission of measurement data to the USB device will  
begin.  
Renaming MCACC presets  
Transmission is complete when “Complete” is  
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re  
using, you may want to rename them for easier  
identification.  
2
displayed.  
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then  
select an appropriate preset name.  
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a  
preset name.  
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,  
then press RETURN when you’re finished.  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
Note  
1 MCACC data and parameters are transferred from this receiver to a USB device and by connecting the USB device to a computer, the data is  
imported via the MCACC software in the computer. See Connecting a USB device for Advanced MCACC output on page 35 for more on this.  
2 Only one set of reverb characteristics is stored on the receiver. If you wish to compare several different measurement results, transmit the  
data to the USB memory each time reverb measurements are taken.  
3 This can be done in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 75,  
either of which you should have already completed.  
82  
En  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
Copying MCACC preset data  
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 77), we  
1
recommend copying your current settings to an unused  
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will  
give you a reference point from which to start.  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
2
3
Select the setting you want to copy.  
All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected  
MCACC preset memory.  
Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and  
speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC  
preset memory.  
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the  
settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy  
them (‘To’).  
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
4
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.  
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES.  
If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.  
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
Clearing MCACC presets  
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets  
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration  
settings of that preset.  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.  
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
3
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.  
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES.  
If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.  
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
Note  
1 The settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 75.  
83  
En  
The System Setup and Other Setup menus  
11  
Chapter 11:  
The System Setup and Other Setup  
menus  
Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu  
Manual speaker setup  
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to  
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need  
to make these settings once (unless you change the  
placement of your current speaker system or add new  
speakers).  
The following section describes how to change the  
speaker-related settings manually and make various  
other settings (input selection, OSD language selection,  
etc.).  
These settings are designed to customize your system,  
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in  
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full  
Auto MCACC) on page 38, it isn’t necessary to make all of  
these settings.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
2
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
CAUTION  
• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are  
output at high volume.  
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home  
Menu.  
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
above if you’re not already at this screen.  
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu, then  
press ENTER  
.
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used  
for surround back terminals and the size, number  
distance and overall balance of the connected  
speakers (see Manual speaker setup below).  
Speaker System – Specifies how you are using your  
surround back speakers (page 85).  
Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of  
speakers you’ve connected (page 85).  
Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to  
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see  
The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your  
speaker system (page 86).  
OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language  
can be changed (see Changing the OSD display  
language (OSD Language) on page 38).  
Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your  
speakers from the listening position (page 86).  
X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker  
system for movie soundtracks (page 87).  
Network Setup – Conducts the setup necessary to  
connect this unit to the network (see Network Setup  
menu on page 87).  
THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are  
using a THX speaker setup (page 87).  
Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect  
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup  
menu on page 89).  
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
84  
En  
The System Setup and Other Setup menus  
11  
4
When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.  
Speaker system setting  
• Default setting: Normal(SB/FH)  
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals  
with this receiver. In addition to a normal home theater  
setup where they are used for the front height speakers  
or front wide speakers, they can be used for bi-amping  
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system  
in another room.  
Speaker Setting  
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration  
2
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency) . It is  
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in  
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full  
Auto MCACC) on page 38 are correct. Note that this  
setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set  
independently.  
1
Select ‘Speaker System’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 84 if you’re not already at this screen.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup  
2
Select the speaker system setting.  
Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home theater  
use with front height speakers in your main (speaker  
system A) setup.  
menu.  
2
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set,  
then select a speaker size.  
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the  
Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home theater  
use with front wide speakers in your main (speaker  
system A) setup.  
3
following speakers:  
Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you  
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send  
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.  
Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker terminals to  
listen to stereo playback in another room (see  
Switching the speaker terminals on page 63).  
Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker  
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center  
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to  
the front speakers).  
Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-  
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your  
speakers on page 21).  
ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals for an independent system in  
another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on  
page 63).  
FH – Select LARGE if your front height speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front  
height speakers, choose NO (the front height  
3
If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW), or  
Speaker B in Step 2, select the placement of the  
surround speakers.  
In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround  
speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening  
position, the surround sound of 5.1-channel sources is  
heard from the side. This function mixes the sound of the  
surround speakers with the surround back speakers so  
that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the  
4
channel is sent to the front speakers).  
FW – Select LARGE if your front wide speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front  
wide speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel is  
1
rear as it should be.  
5
sent to the front speakers).  
ON SIDE – Select when the surround speakers is  
positioned right beside you.  
IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker is  
positioned obliquely behind you.  
Note  
1 Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results. In this case,  
set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.  
2 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.  
3 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center, surround, surround back, front  
height and front wide speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the  
subwoofer.  
4 • You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FH).  
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, this setting will automatically be set to NO.  
5 • You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FW).  
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, this setting will automatically be set to NO.  
85  
En  
The System Setup and Other Setup menus  
11  
Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the  
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a  
subwoofer).  
Channel Level  
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the  
overall balance of your speaker system, an important  
factor when setting up a home theater system.  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
The test tones will start.  
SB – Select the number of surround back speakers  
1
you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or  
2
Adjust the level of each channel using /  
.
LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce  
bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or  
SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround back speakers choose NO.  
Use / to switch speakers.  
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is  
4
emitted.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels  
set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when  
YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want  
the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or  
you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that  
would normally come out the front and center  
Tip  
• You can change the channel levels by press  
RECEIVER, then press CH LEVEL, and then using /  
on the remote control.  
2
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did  
not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass  
frequencies are output from other speakers).  
Speaker Distance  
For good sound depth and separation from your system,  
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from  
the listening position. The receiver can then add the  
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.  
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.3  
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Setup menu.  
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using /.  
1
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in /2 inch  
Increments.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Tip  
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround  
back speakers are the same distance from the  
listening position.  
Note  
1 • If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Speaker system setting on page 85) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.  
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.  
2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This  
may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in  
the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good  
results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears  
judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL  
for the front speakers.  
3 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds  
playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.  
• With Full Auto MCACC Setup or Auto MCACC Setup (ALL or Speaker Setting), the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency  
will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity  
of all connected speakers and human aural characteristics.  
• If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.  
4 If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker  
to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).  
86  
En  
The System Setup and Other Setup menus  
11  
5
Specify whether your subwoofer is Select2 certified  
X-Curve  
or not.  
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright  
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts  
as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and  
restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks.1  
If your subwoofer isn’t THX Select2 certified, but you still  
want to switch boundary gain compensation on, select  
YES here, but the effect might not work properly.  
6
Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain  
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Compensation setting.  
2
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.  
7
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed  
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at  
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope  
increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the  
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your  
room size:  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Network Setup menu  
Setting up the network to listen to Internet radio on this  
receiver.  
Room size (ft2)  
400 550 650 800 2200 12000  
X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5  
–1.0  
–1.5 –2.0  
–2.5  
–3.0  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
1
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
the X-Curve has no effect.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
THX Audio Setting  
2
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu  
.
This menu allows the user to adjust various THX features  
including Loudness Plus, SBch processing, SB Speaker  
Position, THX Select2 Subwoofer (on/off), and Boundary  
Gain Control. Please see page 103 for details regarding  
these THX features.  
3
Select ‘Network Setup’ from the System Setup  
menu.  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
1
Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP  
setup menu.  
IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/Proxy of  
this receiver (page 88).  
2
Select either ON or OFF for the THX Loudness Plus  
setting.  
Information – Checks the MAC address and the  
firmware version of the Network section of this  
receiver (page 88).  
3
Specify whether the SBch processing is AUTO or  
MANUAL.  
Network Standby – Allows the Web Control  
function to be used even when the receiver is in the  
standby mode (page 88).  
AUTO When surround back speakers are connected,  
whether or not surround back channel signals are  
present in the audio signals being input is detected  
and the appropriate THX surround mode is set.  
MANUAL – The desired THX surround mode can be  
selected regardless of whether or not surround back  
channel signals are present in the audio signals  
being input.  
4
Specify the distance of your surround back speakers  
from each other.  
0–1 ft – Surround back speakers within 1 foot apart.  
>1–4 ft – Surround back speakers between 1 and 4  
feet apart.  
4 ft< – Surround back speakers more than 4 feet  
apart (default).  
Note  
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX or Pure direct modes.  
87  
En  
The System Setup and Other Setup menus  
11  
1
Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the Network Setup  
IP address/Proxy setting  
menu.  
In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this  
receiver is a broadband router (with a built-in DHCP  
server function), simply turn on the DHCP server  
function, and you will not need to set up the network  
manually. You must set up the network as described  
below only when you have connected this receiver to a  
broadband router without a DHCP server function.  
Before you set up the network, consult with your ISP or  
the network manager for the required settings. It is  
advised that you also refer to the operation manual  
2
Select the DHCP setting you want.  
When you select ON, the network is automatically set up,  
and you do not need to follow Steps 3. Proceed with Step  
4.  
If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select  
ON, this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to  
determine the IP address.  
2
3
Enter the IP Address  
Gateway Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS  
Server  
,
Subnet Mask, Default  
1
supplied with your network component.  
,
IP Address  
.
The IP address to be entered must be defined within the  
following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the  
following ranges, you cannot listen to Internet radio  
stations.  
Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254  
Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254  
Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254  
Press / to select a number and / to move the  
cursor.  
4
Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the Enable Proxy Server  
setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server.  
In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In case you  
select ‘ON’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 5.  
Subnet Mask  
5
Enter the address of your proxy server or the  
In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly  
connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask  
provided by your ISP on paper. In most cases, enter  
255.255.255.0.  
domain name.  
6
Enter the port number of your proxy server.  
Use the numeric buttons to enter the port number.  
7
Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/Proxy setup.  
Default Gateway  
In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver,  
enter the corresponding IP address.  
Checking the MAC address  
You can check the MAC address.  
Primary DNS Server/Secondary DNS Server  
In case there is only one DNS server address provided by  
your ISP on paper, enter it in the ‘Primary DNS Server’  
field. In case there are more than two DNS server  
addresses, enter ‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other  
DNS server address field.  
1
Select ‘Information’ from the Network Setup  
menu.  
Network Standby  
This setting allows the Web Control function (page 65)  
for operating the receiver from a computer connected on  
the same LAN as the receiver to be used even when the  
receiver is in the standby mode.  
Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port  
This setting is required when you connect this receiver to  
the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of  
your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also,  
enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy  
Port’ field.  
1
Select ‘Network Standby’ from the Network Setup  
menu.  
2
Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF.  
ON – The Web Control function can be used even  
Tip  
when the receiver is in the standby mode.  
• Press / or the numeric buttons to enter  
alphanumeric characters. To delete alphanumeric  
characters entered one at a time, press CLEAR.  
OFF – The Web Control function cannot be used  
when the receiver is in the standby mode (This lets  
you reduce power consumption in the standby  
mode).  
Note  
1 In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network  
settings of this receiver.  
2 The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Internet radio station if the IP address is set for the  
Auto IP function.  
88  
En  
The System Setup and Other Setup menus  
11  
Volume Setup  
You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or  
specify what the volume level will be when the power is  
turned on.  
The Other Setup menu  
The Other Setup menu is where you can make  
customized settings to reflect how you are using the  
receiver.  
1
Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.  
2
Select the Power ON Level setting you want.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
1
Press  
The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same  
level when the receiver’s power is turned on.  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
LAST (default) – When the power is turned on, the  
volume is set to the same level as when the power  
was last turned off.  
• “---” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set  
to minimum level.  
2
3
4
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
–80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to be set  
when the power is turned on, in steps of 0.5 dB.  
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the  
value specified at Volume Limit setup (see below).  
HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with your  
Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI  
(page 57).  
3
Select the Volume Limit setting you want.  
Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The  
volume cannot be increased above the level set here,  
even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial  
on the front panel).  
Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related  
operations of this receiver (see below)  
.
Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this receiver’s  
remote control mode (see below).  
OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not limited.  
–20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum volume is  
limited to the value set here.  
Flicker Reduction – Adjusts the way the GUI screen  
looks (page 90).  
4
Select the Mute Level setting you want.  
EXTENSION Setup – Allows the CU-RF100 to be used  
even when the receiver is in the standby mode  
(page 90).  
This sets how much the volume is to be turned down  
when MUTE is pressed.  
FULL (default) – No sound.  
Multi Ch In Setup Specifies the optional settings for  
a multi-channel input (page 90).  
–40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be turned down  
to the level specified here.  
Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a Bluetooth  
ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device  
(page 51).  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
Remote Control Mode Setup  
• Default setting: 1  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent  
erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver  
are being used.  
1
Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the  
Other Setup menu.  
2
3
4
Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.  
Select “OK” to change the remote control mode.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to change the  
remote control’s setting.  
See Operating multiple receivers on page 67.  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
89  
En  
The System Setup and Other Setup menus  
11  
Flicker Reduction Setup  
• Default setting: OFF  
The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel  
the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting.  
Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the  
GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.  
1
Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other  
Setup menu.  
2
3
Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.  
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
EXTENSION Setup  
• Default setting: OFF  
The CU-RF100 can be used to operate the receiver by RF  
communications. To do so, set the EXTENSION setting to  
ON. When ON is set here, the receiver can be operated  
even when the receiver is in the standby mode.  
1
Select ‘EXTENSION Setup’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
2
3
Select the EXTENSION setting you want.  
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Multi Channel Input Setup  
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-  
channel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is  
selected as an input function, you can display the video  
images of other input functions. In the Multi Channel  
Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-  
channel input.  
1
Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
2
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.  
0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level  
originally recorded on the source.  
+10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level  
increased by 10 dB.  
3
Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.  
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input  
function, you can display the video images of other input  
functions. The video input can be selected from the  
following: DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO, OFF.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
90  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Chapter 12:  
Additional information  
Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation  
If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same  
direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and  
left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced  
properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards  
the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped.  
Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research Group  
has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be  
achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area  
30 cm to 80 cm (12 inches to 31 inches) behind the  
listening position (between the surround speakers and  
the listening position).  
Speaker Setting Guide  
In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is  
important to accurately position the speakers and make  
their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to  
finely focus the multi-channel sound.  
The three major elements in positioning the speakers are  
distance, angle and orientation (the direction in which  
the speakers are pointing).  
Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be  
equal.  
However, the sense of sound positioning can differ  
according to the conditions in the room and the speakers  
being used. In smaller environments in particular (when  
the front speakers are close to the listening position),  
with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.  
We suggest you use this example of installation as  
reference when trying out different installation methods.  
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.  
Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally  
symmetrical.  
In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this  
environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is  
possible to automatically correct the speaker distance  
1
electrically to a precision of /2 inch using the Full Auto  
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer  
Placing the subwoofer between the center and front  
speakers makes even music sources sound more natural  
(if there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is  
placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound  
output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is  
no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is  
placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not  
cancel out the bass sound output from the other  
speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result  
in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could  
excessively amplify the bass sound.  
MCACC Setup function (page 38).  
Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment  
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers  
are steady, and leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) from the  
surrounding walls. Position the speakers attentively so  
that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles  
from the listening position (center of the adjustments).  
(We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the  
layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant  
from the listening position.  
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at  
an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This  
can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but  
depending on the shape of the room this could result in  
standing waves. However, even if standing waves are  
generated, their influence on the sound quality can be  
prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave  
control function (page 81).  
Tip  
• If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a  
circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance  
correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to  
make them equalize the distance artificially.  
Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height  
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.  
Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid-  
and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.  
Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC  
Setup (auto sound field correction) function  
It is more effective to perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup  
(page 38) procedure once the adjustments described  
above have been completed.  
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as  
the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it  
to the listening position.  
Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height  
of the ears.  
Tip  
• The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger  
than the distance actually measured with a tape  
measure, etc. This is because this distance is  
corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.  
91  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Position of center speaker and monitor  
Positional relationship between speakers  
and monitor  
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker,  
keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the  
screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs  
using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center  
speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point  
it towards the listening position.  
Position of front speakers and monitor  
The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible  
to the monitor.  
Installation on floor  
(Diagram as seen  
from the side)  
TV  
L
R
Monitor  
45° to 60°  
• If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install  
it away from the TV.  
• When installing the center speaker on top of the  
monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards  
the listening position.  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug  
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
Power  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.  
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.  
Power cannot be turned off.  
• Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 or ZONE 3, then press RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.  
(ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON is  
displayed.)  
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of  
off or the iPod iPhone  
wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.  
indicator blinks.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized  
independent service company.  
During loud playback the  
• Turn down the volume.  
power suddenly switches off.  
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 77.  
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press  
STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE / to select D.SAFETY  
OFF, and then use PRESET / to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY OFFto deactivate this  
feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on,  
some features may be unavailable.  
The unit does not respond  
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.  
when the buttons are pressed.  
• Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.  
92  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug the receiver  
then the power automatically from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.  
switches off. The ADVANCED  
MCACC blinks and the power  
does not turn on.  
The PQLS flashes and power  
turns off.  
• There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning on the power after 1 minute. If  
the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a  
Pioneer authorized independent service company. (Other symptoms may appear when the power is  
turned on.)  
OVERHEAT blinks in the  
display or AMP OVERHEAT  
and the indicator at the center  
of the receiver flash and the  
power turns off.  
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.  
• Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.  
The receiver suddenly power  
off or ADVANCED MCACC  
flashes.  
• The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized  
independent service company.  
Display blinks 12V TRG ERR. • An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.  
No sound  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an  
input function is selected.  
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).  
• Make sure the correct input function is selected.  
No sound is output from the  
front speakers.  
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.  
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is  
selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.  
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 16).  
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).  
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected;  
center speakers.  
select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 53).  
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).  
No sound from surround back • Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speakers  
speakers.  
are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19). If only one surround  
back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.  
• Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to Speaker B and audio is  
being played through speaker B.  
No sound from front height or • Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround  
front wide speakers.  
speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).  
No sound from subwoofer.  
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.  
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.  
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of  
your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings  
to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on  
page 85).  
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options  
on page 60).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).  
93  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound from one speaker.  
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 86).  
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 85).  
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening  
modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 53).  
Sound is produced from  
analog components, but not  
from digital ones (DVD, LD,  
CD-ROM, etc.).  
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 56).  
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected  
to (see The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input function.  
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.  
output when Dolby Digital/DTS  
software is played back.  
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set  
to On.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
No sound when using the  
• If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the Home Menu.  
Home Menu.  
Other audio problems  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Broadcast stations cannot be For FM broadcasts  
selected automatically, or  
there is considerable noise in  
radio broadcasts.  
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 32).  
For AM broadcasts  
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 32).  
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor,  
etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.  
Noise is output when scanning • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital  
a DTS CD.  
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when  
scanning.  
When playing a DTS format LD • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 56).  
there is audible noise on the  
soundtrack.  
Can’t record audio.  
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an  
analog source.  
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.  
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting the  
multichannel analog inputs on page 29).  
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see  
Speaker Setting on page 85).  
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the  
correctly, but the playback  
sound is odd.  
receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the  
speakers on page 19).  
The PHASE CONTROL feature • If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is  
doesn’t seem to have an  
audible effect.  
set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or  
depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).  
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on  
page 86).  
Noise or hum can be heard  
even when there is no sound  
being input.  
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source  
are not causing interference.  
94  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Can’t select some Input  
functions by the INPUT  
SELECTOR on the front panel  
or the INPUT SELECT button on  
the remote control.  
• Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu.  
• Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF.  
There seems to be a time lag • See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 38 to set up your  
between the speakers and the system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).  
output of the subwoofer.  
Speaker switching sound  
• Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide) and surround back speakers may  
(clicking sound) is heard from switch automatically in function of changes in the input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking  
receiver during playback.  
sound) will be heard from the receiver at this time. If this sound bothers you, we recommend  
changing the listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 53).  
The maximum volume  
• Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on page 89).  
available (shown in the front  
panel display) is lower than the  
+12dB maximum.  
• The channel level setting may be over 0dB.  
ADAPTER PORT  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The Bluetooth wireless  
technology device cannot be  
connected or operated.  
Sound from the Bluetooth  
wireless technology device is  
not emitted or the sound is  
interrupted.  
• Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band (microwave  
oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If  
such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it. Or, stop using the object emitting the  
electromagnetic waves.  
• Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that  
obstructions are not set between the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit. Set  
the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between them is  
less than about 10 m and no obstructions exist between them.  
• Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are correctly connected.  
• The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode  
supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless  
technology device.  
• Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the Bluetooth  
wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.  
• Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that supports  
A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.  
Video  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No image is output when an  
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 27).  
input is selected.  
• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another component are  
connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 62), you must connect your TV  
to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video or  
HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 40).  
• Check the video output settings of the source component.  
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.  
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If  
adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 62) and/or the  
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video  
Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 62) to OFF.  
Can’t record video.  
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.  
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video  
cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to  
this receiver.  
95  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video  
picture.  
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend  
on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and  
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then start playback again.  
Video signals are not output  
• When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal  
from the component terminal. and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the  
monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following:  
– Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.  
– Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting.  
– Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component terminals. Input the  
video signals from the player or other source to the composite or component terminals. When using  
the component terminal, assign it at Input Setup.  
The picture’s movement is  
unnatural.  
• When Resolution under VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080/24p, the picture may not be displayed  
properly for some source materials. In this case, set the resolution to something other than 1080/24p  
(page 62).  
Settings  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The Auto MCACC Setup  
continually shows an error.  
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see  
also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40). If the noise level cannot be kept low  
enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 84).  
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the  
surround back channel.  
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:  
– The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.  
Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase may be  
displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.  
– If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that  
affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify  
the polarity.  
After using the Auto MCACC • There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.  
Setup, the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.  
is incorrect.  
• Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers, room size,  
speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in  
Speaker Setting on page 85, and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu  
in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 75 if this is a recurring problem.  
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker • Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative () terminals are  
Distance setting (page 78)  
matched up properly).  
properly.  
The display shows KEY LOCK ON • With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON for about 10 seconds while holding down  
when you try to make settings. SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.  
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.  
erased.  
• Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before unplugging the  
power cord.  
The various system settings are • Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone out before unplugging.  
not stored.  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The EQ response displayed in • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto  
the graphical output following MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal  
calibration does not appear  
sound.  
entirely flat.  
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment  
needed.  
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.  
96  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
EQ adjustments made using  
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these  
the Manual MCACC setup on adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken into account by the  
page 77 do not appear to  
filters dedicated to overall system calibration.  
change the graphical output.  
Lower frequency response  
curves do not seem to have  
been calibrated for SMALL  
speakers.  
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers  
that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.  
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable  
sound is output for display.  
Display  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The display is dark or off.  
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
You can’t get DIGITAL to  
display when using SIGNAL  
SEL.  
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The  
Input Setup menu on page 40).  
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input function.  
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not • These indicators do not light if playback is paused.  
light when playing Dolby/DTS  
software.  
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.  
When playing Dolby Digital or • Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.  
DTS sources, the receiver’s  
format indicators do not light.  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 56).  
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.  
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.  
When playing certain discs,  
none of the receiver’s format  
indicators light.  
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what  
audio tracks are recorded on the disc.  
When playing a disc with the • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 56).  
listening mode set to Auto  
Surround or ALC, 2 PL II or  
Neo:6 appear on the receiver.  
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is  
not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.  
During playback of DVD-Audio, • This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a  
the display shows PCM.  
malfunction.  
The power turns off  
• See the Power section (page 92).  
automatically and some  
indicator flashes, or some  
indicator flashes and the power  
does not turn on.  
Remote control  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Cannot be remote controlled. • Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it matches the setting on the main unit  
(see Operating multiple receivers on page 67).  
• Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control Mode Setup  
on page 89).  
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 10).  
• Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 10).  
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.  
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.  
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating other Pioneer components with  
this unit’s sensor on page 36).  
Other components can’t be  
operated with the system  
remote.  
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.  
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.  
• When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the learning  
function, in some cases they may not be learned properly. In this case, register the commands again  
using the learning function (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 68). If they  
still do not work, they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote  
control. Operate the device using another remote control.  
97  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Web Control  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Top Menu screen is not  
displayed on browser.  
This receiver’s IP address has not been entered Check the receiver’s IP address and enter it  
correctly in the browser (page 87).  
into the browser correctly.  
Receiver cannot be operated JavaScript is disabled on the internet browser.  
Enable JavaScript.  
from browser.  
The browser is not compatible with JavaScript.  
Use an internet browser that is compatible with  
JavaScript.  
Receiver’s power does not  
turn on when the power is  
turned on using the Web  
Control function.  
Network Standby at Network Setup is set to  
OFF.  
Set Network Standby at Network Setup to ON  
(page 88).  
HDMI  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The HDMI indicator blinks  
• Check all the points below.  
continuously.  
No picture or sound.  
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-  
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component or composite video jacks.  
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver  
(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component or composite video jacks  
between source and receiver.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,  
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
• If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Color or other setting  
for your component.  
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio  
output.  
®
• To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI Cable) to connect this  
receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature.  
No picture.  
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 62).  
• Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal (in Switching the HDMI output  
on page 65).  
No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.  
ceases.  
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.  
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.  
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.  
• HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this,  
interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.  
• Turning on/off the device connected to this unit's HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or  
disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.  
Noisy or distorted picture.  
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the  
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may  
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect  
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then  
start playback again.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,  
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
HDCP ERROR shows in the  
display.  
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible  
with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component or  
composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be  
displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.  
When Control with HDMI is  
set to ON, the HDMI Input  
assignment at Input Setup is  
canceled.  
• Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON, for Digital In assignment of HDMI 1 is not canceled,  
so in this case use the HDMI 1 input.  
98  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Synchronized operation not  
possible using Control with  
HDMI function.  
• Check the HDMI connections.  
• The cable may be damaged.  
• Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page 57).  
• Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page 57).  
• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.  
• Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating instructions).  
• Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1. Then turn  
on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.  
Important information regarding the HDMI connection  
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-  
equipped component you are connecting–check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).  
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the  
following configurations when connecting up.  
Configuration A  
Configuration B  
Use component video cables to connect the video output  
of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s  
component video input. The receiver can then convert the  
analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal  
for transmission to the display. For this configuration,  
use the most convenient connection (digital is  
recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the  
operating instructions for more on audio connections.  
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the  
display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most  
convenient connection (digital is recommended) for  
sending audio to the receiver. See the operating  
instructions for more on audio connections. Set the display  
volume to minimum when using this configuration.  
Note  
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can  
only receive HDMI video from the connected  
component.  
Note  
• The picture quality will change slightly during  
conversion.  
• Depending on the component, audio output may be  
limited to the number of channels available from the  
connected display unit (for example audio output is  
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio  
limitations).  
• If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to  
switch functions on both the receiver and your  
display unit.  
• Since the sound is muted on the display when using  
the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on  
the display every time you switch input functions.  
USB interface  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
The folders/files stored on a  
The folders/files are currently stored in a region Store the folders/files in the FAT region.  
USB memory device are not other than the FAT (File Allocation Table) region.  
displayed.  
The number of levels in a folder is more than 8.  
Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to  
8 (page 44).  
There are more than 30 000 folders/files stored in Limit the maximum number of folders/files stored  
a USB memory device.  
in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page 44).  
The audio files are copyrighted.  
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory  
device cannot be played back (page 44).  
99  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
A USB memory device is not The USB memory device does not support the  
Try using a USB memory device compatible with  
the mass storage class specifications. Note that  
there are cases where even the audio files stored  
on a USB memory device compatible with the  
mass storage class specifications are not played  
back on this receiver (page 44).  
recognized.  
mass storage class specifications.  
Connect the USB memory device and switch on  
this receiver (page 35).  
A USB hub is currently being used.  
This receiver does not support USB hubs  
(page 44).  
This receiver recognizes the USB memory device Switch off and on again this receiver.  
as a fraud.  
A USB memory device is  
Some formats of USB memory devices, including Check whether the format of your USB memory  
connected and displayed, but FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS, cannot be played back on device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT  
the audio files stored on the  
USB memory device cannot  
be played back.  
this receiver.  
12, NTFS, and HFS formats cannot be played back  
on this receiver (page 44).  
The file format cannot be properly played back on See the list of file formats that can be played back  
this receiver. on this receiver (page 45).  
Cannot detect USB keyboard. The USB keyboard is routed through a USB hub. This receiver is not compatible with USB hubs.  
Plug the keyboard directly into the receiver.  
A PS2 keyboard is routed through a PS2/USB  
connector.  
PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this receiver,  
even if routed through a PS2/USB connector. Use  
a USB keyboard.  
Keyboard is not a USB HID Class device.  
Some devices will not be detected. Use a USB HID  
Class keyboard.  
Cannot enter correct text  
using the USB keyboard.  
Keyboard is not US-international layout keyboard. Use a US-international layout keyboard. NB:  
Some characters cannot be entered.  
Internet radio  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Cannot access the network.  
(“Connection Error” shows in  
the display.)  
The LAN cable is not firmly connected.  
The router is not switched on.  
Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 33).  
Switch on the router.  
The network device was switched on when this  
Switch the network device on before the receiver.  
receiver was already on.  
Cannot listen to Internet radio The firewall settings for components on the  
Check the firewall settings for components on the  
network.  
stations.  
network are currently in operation.  
(“Connection Error” shows in  
the display.)  
You are currently disconnected from the Internet. Check the connection settings for components on  
the network, and consult with your network  
service provider if necessary (page 87).  
The URL for the Internet radio station is  
incorrectly programmed.  
Check that the URL was correctly entered when  
programming.  
The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are Broadcasts may be interrupted or suspended by  
the radio station.  
stopped or interrupted.  
An Internet radio station is selected whose  
protocol this receiver does not recognize.  
This receiver does not recognize protocols other  
than ‘http’ and ‘mms’.  
An Internet radio station had closed or moved.  
Enter new internet radio station on the Internet  
Radio Setup.  
Cannot listen to Internet radio Broadcast is in a format not compatible with this This receiver cannot play audio in formats other  
stations. (“File Format Errorreceiver.  
shows in the display.)  
than MP3 or WMA. Also, even if they are MP3 or  
WMA formats, this receiver may not be able to  
play back.  
100  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
The Internet radio settings  
screen cannot be displayed on into the browser correctly.  
This receiver’s IP address has not been entered Check the receiver’s IP address and enter it  
correctly on the browser (page 87).  
the computer Internet  
browser.  
JavaScript is disabled on the Internet browser.  
The browser is not compatible with JavaScript.  
Enable JavaScript.  
Use an Internet browser that is compatible with  
JavaScript.  
XM radio messages  
Status messages  
Check XM Tuner  
Cause  
Action  
The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed or not fully seated Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock  
in the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM Mini-  
Tuner Dock is not connected to this receiver.  
and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cable is  
connected to this receiver.  
Check Antenna  
Loading  
The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-  
Tuner Home Dock or the XM antenna cable is  
damaged.  
Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to  
the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the  
antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna  
if the cable is damaged.  
The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program  
information from the XM satellite signal. This  
message can also occur in weak XM signal  
conditions.  
This message should disappear in a few seconds in  
good signal conditions.  
If you see this message often, reposition the XM  
antenna for better signal reception.  
Note that this receiver may not respond to some  
buttons while this message is displayed.  
Use the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the  
antenna position.  
No Signal  
The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the  
signal. Something may be blocking the XM XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the  
antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna  
properly aimed.  
position.  
See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner  
and Home Dock for antenna installation  
information.  
Off Air  
The XM channel you selected is not currently  
Check back later.  
broadcasting.  
CH Unauthorized  
You selected an XM channel that is blocked or  
cannot be received with your XM subscription  
package.  
Consult the latest channel guide at  
www.xmradio.com for the current list of channels.  
For information on receiving this channel, visit  
www.xmradio.com or contact XM Satellite Radio at  
1-800-967-2346.  
CH Unavailable  
The selected channel is not available. The channel Consult the latest channel guide at  
may have been reassigned to a different channel  
number.  
www.xmradio.com for the current list of channels.  
For cases of a new radio or a radio that has not  
received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow  
the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least  
5 minutes and then try to select the channel again.  
This message may occur initially with a new radio or  
a radio that has not received XM’s signal for an  
extended period.  
– – – – – – – –  
No artist name or song title is available for this  
No action required.  
selection.  
101  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Status messages  
Cause  
Action  
Upgrade XM Tuner  
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. This Contact XM Listener Care (1-800-967-2346) and ask  
receiver features advanced technology that is  
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner.  
about upgrading your XM CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-  
Tuner.  
Have this receiver’s model name and CNP-1000 XM  
Radio ID number ready beforehand, and explain that  
this receiver is displaying the message Upgrade XM  
Tuner.  
If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected and  
you see this message, turn off this receiver, make  
sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the  
Mini-Tuner Home Dock, and then turn this receiver  
on again. If the message reappears, contact XM  
Listener Care and explain the issue that you’re  
experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.  
XM Power Error  
A short-circuit occurring in the antenna or  
surrounding antenna cable.  
Make sure that there is nothing unusual with the  
antenna or antenna cable. Switch the power off,  
then back on again.  
SIRIUS radio messages  
Status messages  
Antenna Error  
Cause  
Action  
The SIRIUS antenna is not properly  
Check that the antenna cable is attached securely.  
connected.  
Check Sirius Tuner  
Acquiring Signal  
The SiriusConnect™ tuner is not properly  
connected.  
Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter are  
attached securely.  
The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the  
location.  
SIRIUS antenna to get better signal reception. Use the  
Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna position.  
Subscription Updating  
Updating Channels  
Invalid Channel  
Unit is updating subscription.  
Wait until the channel subscription has been updated.  
Wait until the channel information has been updated.  
Select another channel.  
Unit is updating the channel information.  
Selected channel is not available/does not  
exist.  
Firmware Updating  
The SiriusConnect™ tuner’s firmware is  
Wait for updating to finish.  
being updated.  
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the  
remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:  
• Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.  
• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds. The  
power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.)  
102  
En  
Additional information  
Surround sound formats  
12  
About THX  
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound  
formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and  
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.  
The THX technologies are explained below. See  
www.thx.com for more detailed information.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See  
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.  
THX Cinema processing  
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by  
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your  
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your  
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.  
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called  
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres  
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then  
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not  
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX  
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate  
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,  
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,  
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added  
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EXand the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
DTS  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.  
Re-Equalization  
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and  
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because  
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie  
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization  
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in  
a small home environment.  
Timbre Matching  
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the  
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is  
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all  
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the  
side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information  
going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the  
tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This  
ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:  
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;  
6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 &  
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS  
and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-  
HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of  
DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights  
Reserved.  
Adaptive Decorrelation  
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create  
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre  
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround  
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and  
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest  
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive  
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and  
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This  
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—  
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a  
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
THX Select2 Plus  
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 Plus  
certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a  
rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a  
product feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee  
that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb  
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus requirements  
cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power  
amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other  
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
103  
En  
Additional information  
12  
THX Surround EX  
THX Select2 Music  
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development  
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film  
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been  
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called  
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the  
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,  
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel  
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the  
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the  
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home  
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the  
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be  
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.  
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Select2 Music mode  
should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the  
surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS,  
Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear  
soundstage.  
THX Select2 Games  
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX  
Select2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA  
processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0  
encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.  
This accurately places all game audio surround information,  
providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Select2 Games  
mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all  
points of the surround field.  
Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX  
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this  
new technology in the home.  
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during  
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital  
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the  
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may  
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the  
tastes of the individual listener.  
THX, the THX logo and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which  
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other  
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
About iPod  
Boundary Gain Compensation™  
Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener  
may experience an excessive bass effect. This feature compensates  
for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature  
is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX  
Select2™ specifications.  
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has  
been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has  
been certified by the developer to meet Apple  
performance standards.  
THX Loudness Plus Description  
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in  
THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified amplifiers. With  
THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the  
rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of  
turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound  
elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX  
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur  
when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient  
surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users  
to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume  
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in  
any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX  
Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus  
settings for each type of content.  
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory  
has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and  
has been certified by the developer to meet Apple  
performance standards.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or  
its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries.  
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
THX Select2 Cinema  
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers  
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,  
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back  
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and  
directional surround sounds.  
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2  
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.  
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital  
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that  
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select  
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema  
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.  
104  
En  
Additional information  
About SIRIUS and XM  
12  
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius  
XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the  
property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and  
XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee  
may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold  
separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio  
service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited  
to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate  
or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated  
in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio  
Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.  
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM  
Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available  
in Alaska and Hawaii.  
Record the SiriusConnect™ tuner ID below for reference.  
Record the XM Radio ID below for reference.  
Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.  
105  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats  
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see  
Using Stream Direct on page 55) you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
Input signal format  
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
Auto Surround / ALC / DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
As above  
SACD sources  
As above  
As above  
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
SACD sources  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
Multichannel signal formats  
Input signal format  
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)  
Auto Surround / ALC  
Dolby Digital EX  
PURE DIRECT / DIRECT  
Dolby Digital EX  
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)  
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)  
DTS-HD sources  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Straight decoding  
As above  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources  
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected  
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM  
As above  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)  
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources  
As above  
As above  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
106  
En  
Additional information  
Preset code list  
12  
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that there  
are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There are also  
cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.  
Important  
• We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not be possible  
even if a preset code is entered.  
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote  
individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on  
page 68).  
example:  
Category  
TV  
Pioneer 0004  
Preset code  
Manufacturer  
TV  
Pioneer 0004, 0006, 0113, 0115,  
Curtis Mathes 0000, 0004, 0006,  
0014, 0100, 0101  
Hitachi 0004, 0006, 0007  
Motorola 0003, 0014  
0116, 0117, 0119, 0122, 0123  
Hyundai 0098  
MTC 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100  
Multitech 0008, 0104, 0110  
CXC 0008, 0104  
Admiral 0001, 0014  
Adventura 0012  
Aiwa 0002  
Ilo 0089, 0091  
IMA 0008  
Infinity 0101  
InFocus 0074  
Initial 0091  
Insignia 0085, 0086  
Inteq 0099  
Janeil 0012  
JBL 0101  
JC Penney 0000, 0004, 0005, 0006,  
0010  
Cytron 0093  
NAD 0006, 0102  
NEC 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100  
Net-TV 0107  
Daewoo 0004, 0005, 0006, 0023  
Daytron 0004, 0006  
Dell 0073  
DiamondVision 0096  
Dimensia 0000  
Disney 0046  
Dumont 0004, 0011, 0099  
Durabrand 0041, 0103, 0104  
Dwin 0014  
Akai 0002, 0100  
Albatron 0097  
Nikko 0006, 0100  
Norcent 0060  
Olevia 0048, 0054, 0059  
Onwa 0008, 0104  
Oppo 0095  
Optimus 0105  
Optoma 0075  
Optonica 0014  
Orion 0025  
Panasonic 0003, 0010, 0017, 0027,  
0105, 0114, 0120, 0121, 0124, 0125  
Penney 0100, 0102  
Philco 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007,  
0100, 0101  
Philips0003, 0004, 0007, 0019, 0020,  
0101  
Philips Magnavox 0019  
Pilot 0004, 0100  
Alleron 0009  
America Action 0104  
Amtron 0008  
Anam 0104  
Anam National 0003, 0008  
AOC 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100  
Apex 0021, 0102, 0106  
Audiovox 0008, 0104  
Aventura 0103  
Electroband 0002  
Electrograph 0107  
Electrohome 0002, 0003, 0004,  
0006  
JCB 0002  
Jensen 0004, 0006  
JVC 0007, 0010, 0044, 5064  
Axion 0094  
Kawasho 0002, 0004, 0006  
KEC 0104  
Element 0082  
Bang & Olufsen 0111  
Belcor 0004  
Emerson 0004, 0006, 0007, 0008,  
0009, 0023, 0103, 0104  
Emprex 0092  
Kenwood 0004, 0006, 0100  
KLH 0106  
Bell & Howell 0001  
Benq 0064  
Kloss Novabeam 0008, 0012  
KTV 0008, 0100, 0104, 0110  
Envision 0004, 0006, 0100  
Epson 0061  
ESA 0103  
Fujitsu 0009  
Funai 0008, 0009, 0103, 0104  
Futuretech 0008, 0104  
Bradford 0008, 0104  
Brillian 0109  
LG 0005, 0052, 0078, 0097  
Logik 0001  
Luxman 0004, 0006  
LXI 0000, 0006, 0101, 0102  
Brockwood 0004  
Broksonic 0104  
Polaroid 0057, 0106  
Portland 0004, 0005, 0006  
Prima 0065  
Candle 0004, 0006, 0012, 0100  
Carnivale 0100  
Magnavox 0004, 0006, 0019, 0020,  
0037, 0042, 0100, 0101  
Majestic 0001  
Princeton 0097  
Carver 0101  
Gateway 0067, 0107, 0108  
GE 0000, 0003, 0004, 0006, 0010,  
0016, 0039  
Prism 0010  
CCE 0110  
Proscan 0000  
Celebrity 0002  
Marantz 0004, 0006, 0062, 0100,  
0101  
Proton 0004, 0006, 0007  
Protron 0055  
Celera 0106  
GFM 0080, 0084  
Changhong 0106  
Citizen 0004, 0006, 0008, 0100  
Clarion 0104  
Gibralter 0004, 0011, 0099, 0100  
Goldstar 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007,  
0100  
Matsushita 0105  
Proview 0068  
Maxent 0087, 0107  
Megapower 0097  
Pulsar 0004, 0011, 0099  
Gradiente 0066  
Grunpy 0008, 0009, 0104  
Haier 0112  
Hallmark 0004, 0006  
Harman/Kardon 0101  
Harvard 0008, 0104  
Havermy 0014  
Hewlett Packard 0053  
Hisense 0069  
Coby 0056  
Quasar 0003, 0010, 0105  
Megatron 0006  
Colortyme 0004, 0006  
Concerto 0004, 0006  
Contec 0104  
Memorex 0001, 0005, 0006, 0041  
MGA 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100  
Midland 0010, 0011, 0099  
Mintek 0091  
Radio Shack 0100, 0104  
Radio Shack/Realistic 0000, 0004,  
0006, 0007, 0008  
RCA 0000, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006,  
0013, 0024, 0035  
Realistic 0100, 0104  
Runco 0011, 0099, 0100  
Contec/Cony 0007, 0008  
Craig 0008, 0104  
Crosley 0081, 0101  
Crown 0008, 0104  
CTX 0063  
Mitsubishi 0004, 0005, 0006, 0014,  
0045  
Monivision 0097  
Montgomery Ward 0001  
Sampo 0004, 0006, 0100, 0107  
107  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007,  
0022, 0032, 0076, 0077, 0083, 0100,  
0110  
Sony 0002, 0018, 0029, 0030, 0031,  
Syntax 0054  
Vidtech 0004, 0005, 0006  
Viewsonic 0058, 0107  
Viking 0012  
0034  
Syntax-Brillian 0054  
Soundesign 0004, 0006, 0008,  
0009, 0104  
Squareview 0103  
SSS 0004, 0008, 0104  
Starlite 0008, 0104  
Superscan 0014  
Supre-Macy 0012  
Supreme 0002  
SVA 0088  
Sylvania 0004, 0006, 0049, 0079,  
0080, 0100, 0101, 0103  
Symphonic 0008, 0041, 0103, 0104  
Tandy 0014  
Tatung 0003, 0108  
Sansui 0025  
Viore 0089  
Sanyo 0004, 0050  
Vizio 0004, 0070, 0071, 0108  
Technics 0010, 0105  
Techwood 0004, 0006, 0010  
Teknika 0001, 0004, 0005, 0006,  
0007, 0008, 0009, 0101, 0104  
TMK 0004, 0006  
Sceptre 0072  
Wards 0000, 0001, 0004, 0005, 0006,  
Scotch 0006  
0009, 0100, 0101  
Scott 0004, 0006, 0007, 0008, 0009,  
0090, 0104  
Waycon 0102  
Westinghouse 0047, 0051  
White Westinghouse 0023  
Sears 0000, 0004, 0006, 0009, 0101,  
0102, 0103  
TNCi 0099  
Toshiba 0026, 0028, 0036, 0038,  
Yamaha 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100  
Zenith 0001, 0004, 0011, 0015, 0099  
Sharp 0004, 0006, 0007, 0014, 0033  
Sheng Chia 0014  
0040, 0043, 0102  
Vector Research 0100  
Vidikron 0101  
Shogun 0004  
Signature 0001  
DVD  
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes  
for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR).  
Pioneer 2014, 2158  
Denon 2026, 2068  
Desay 2055  
KLH 2070, 2080  
Rowa 2071  
Koss 2024, 2069, 2075  
Accurian 2092  
Advent 2072  
Aiwa 2012  
Akai 2066  
Alco 2070  
Samsung 2009, 2011, 2015, 2031,  
DiamondVision 2042  
Disney 2022  
2044, 2068  
Landel 2093  
Lasonic 2085  
Lenoxx 2074, 2090  
LG 2019, 2051, 2061, 2082, 2087  
Liquid Video 2075  
Liteon 2025, 2092  
Magnavox 2067, 2076, 2091  
Memorex 2066  
Microsoft 2077  
Mintek 2038, 2080, 2086  
Mitsubishi 2020  
Nesa 2080  
Next Base 2093  
Nexxtech 2056  
Onkyo 2076  
Oppo 2041, 2057  
Oritron 2069, 2075  
Panasonic 2005, 2007, 2017, 2032,  
2033, 2050, 2068, 2076  
Philips 2045, 2076  
Proceed 2079  
Proscan 2077  
Sansui 2066  
Durabrand 2090  
Sanyo 2066, 2083  
Sharp 2035  
Emerson 2067, 2082, 2091  
Enterprise 2082  
ESA 2053, 2091  
Fisher 2083  
Funai 2091  
GE 2016, 2077, 2080  
GFM 2043  
Go Video 2087  
Gradiente 2068  
Greenhill 2080  
Haier 2094  
Harman/Kardon 2030, 2084  
Hitachi 2011  
Hiteker 2079  
iLive 2062  
Ilo 2038  
Initial 2038, 2080  
Insignia 2036, 2064, 2091  
Integra 2078  
Sherwood 2063  
Allegro 2087  
Amphion MediaWorks 2037  
AMW 2037  
Shinsonic 2086  
Sonic Blue 2087  
Sony 2003, 2004, 2010, 2012, 2027,  
2046, 2047, 2048  
Apex 2002, 2018, 2079, 2080  
Apple 2058  
Sungale 2054  
Superscan 2067  
Sylvania 2023, 2067, 2091  
Symphonic 2023  
Arrgo 2088  
Aspire 2073  
Astar 2052  
Audiovox 2070  
Axion 2040  
Teac 2070  
Technics 2068  
Theta Digital 2078  
Toshiba 2001, 2006, 2049, 2066,  
2076  
Bang & Olufsen 2081  
Blaupunkt 2080  
Blue Parade 2078  
Boston 2059  
Trutech 2000  
Urban Concepts 2076  
US Logic 2086  
Venturer 2070  
Xbox 2077  
Yamaha 2005, 2068  
Zenith 2019, 2076, 2082, 2087  
Broksonic 2066  
California Audio Labs 2068  
CambridgeSoundWorks 2065  
CineVision 2087  
Coby 2029  
iSymphony 2060  
JBL 2084  
JVC 2013  
Kawasaki 2070  
Kenwood 2028, 2068  
Qwestar 2069  
Curtis Mathes 2089  
CyberHome 2000, 2088  
Cytron 2039  
RCA 2008, 2016, 2070, 2077, 2078,  
2080  
Regent 2074  
Rio 2087  
Daewoo 2021, 2087  
BD  
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes  
for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR).  
Pioneer 2159, 2160  
Kenwood 2044  
LG 2123, 2124  
Marantz 2139, 2140  
Mitsubishi 2137, 2138  
Onkyo 2126  
Panasonic 2114, 2115, 2116  
Philips 2117  
Toshiba 2125, 2099  
Yamaha 2134, 2135, 2136  
Denon 2147, 2148, 2149  
Hitachi 2144, 2145, 2146  
JVC 2127, 2128, 2130, 2131, 2132,  
2133  
Samsung 2119  
Sharp 2141, 2142, 2143  
Sony 2120, 2121, 2122, 2129  
DVR (BDR, HDR)  
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes  
for the DVD, BD.  
Pioneer 2103, 2150, 2151, 2152,  
Sharp 2104, 2112  
Sony 2105, 2108, 2109, 2110, 2113  
Toshiba 2111  
2153, 2154, 2155, 2156, 2157  
Panasonic 2100, 2106  
108  
En  
Additional information  
12  
VCR  
Pioneer 1035  
ABS 1017  
Adventura 1005  
Aiwa 1005  
Alienware 1017  
American High 1004  
Asha 1002  
Audio Dynamics 1000  
Audiovox 1003  
Bang & Olufsen 1032  
Beaumark 1002  
Bell & Howell 1001  
Calix 1003  
Candle 1002, 1003  
Canon 1004  
Garrard 1005  
Gateway 1017  
GE 1002, 1004  
GOI 1029  
MGN Technology 1002  
Microsoft 1017  
Mind 1017  
Sanky 1018  
Sansui 1014, 1019  
Sanyo 1001, 1002  
Sears 1001, 1003, 1004  
Sharp 1012  
Mitsubishi 1010  
Motorola 1004  
MTC 1002  
Goldstar 1000, 1003  
Gradiente 1005  
Shogun 1002  
Singer 1004  
Multitech 1002, 1005  
Harley Davidson 1005  
Harman/Kardon 1000  
Headquarter 1001  
Hewlett Packard 1017  
HNS 1016  
Howard Computers 1017  
HP 1017  
HTS 1029  
Hughes Network Systems 1016,  
1020, 1022, 1023, 1024  
Humax 1016, 1020  
Hush 1017  
iBUYPOWER 1017  
Instant Replay 1004  
Sonic Blue 1026  
Sony 1006, 1009, 1017, 1021  
Stack 1017  
NEC 1000, 1001  
Nikko 1003  
Niveus Media 1017  
Noblex 1002  
STS 1004  
Sylvania 1004, 1005  
Symphonic 1005  
Systemax 1017  
Northgate 1017  
Olympus 1004  
Optimus 1003  
Orion 1014, 1019  
Panasonic 1004, 1008  
Philco 1004  
Philips 1004, 1011, 1016, 1020, 1022,  
1023, 1024, 1025  
Philips Magnavox 1011  
Pilot 1003  
Proscan 1030  
Pulsar 1018  
Tagar Systems 1017  
Tandy 1001  
Citizen 1002, 1003  
Colortyme 1000  
Craig 1002, 1003  
Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004  
Cybernex 1002  
Tashiko 1003  
Teac 1005  
Technics 1004  
Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005  
Tivo 1016, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1025  
TMK 1002  
JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003,  
CyberPower 1017  
1004  
JCL 1004  
Daewoo 1005  
Toshiba 1015, 1017, 1028  
Totevision 1002, 1003  
Touch 1017  
UltimateTV 1031  
Unitech 1002  
Vector Research 1000  
Video Concepts 1000  
Videosonic 1002  
Viewsonic 1017  
Voodoo 1017  
Wards 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005  
XR-1000 1004, 1005  
DBX 1000  
JVC 1000, 1001, 1020, 1029  
Quarter 1001  
Quartz 1001  
Quasar 1004  
Dell 1017  
Kenwood 1000, 1001  
Kodak 1003, 1004  
LG 1003  
Linksys 1017  
Lloyd’s 1005  
LXI 1003  
Magnavox 1004, 1018  
Magnin 1003  
Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004  
Marta 1003  
Matsushita 1004  
Media Center PC 1017  
MEI 1004  
Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004,  
1005, 1018, 1019  
DIRECTV 1016, 1020, 1022, 1023,  
1024, 1027, 1030, 1031  
Dish Network 1029  
Dishpro 1029  
Radio Shack 1003  
Radio Shack/Realistic 1001, 1002,  
1003, 1004, 1005  
Durabrand 1018  
Dynatech 1005  
Echostar 1029  
Electrohome 1003  
Electrophonic 1003  
Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005  
Expressvu 1029  
Fisher 1001  
Fuji 1004  
Funai 1005  
Radix 1003  
Randex 1003  
RCA 1002, 1004, 1007, 1016, 1020,  
1022, 1030, 1031  
Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004,  
1005  
Yamaha 1000, 1001  
Zenith 1013, 1018  
ZT Group 1017  
ReplayTV 1026  
Ricavision 1017  
Runco 1018  
Samsung 1002, 1016, 1022, 1024  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Pioneer 0126, 6097, 6098, 6145  
Echostar 6002, 6089, 6036, 6005,  
6003, 6004, 6146  
McIntosh 6032  
SEI 6139  
Mitsubishi 6038  
Motorola 6032, 6042  
Siemens 6007, 6036  
SKY 6042, 6059, 6030, 6031  
SM Electronic 6011  
Smart 6051  
ADB 6035, 6001  
Akai 6102  
Expressvu 6002, 6004  
Fujitsu 6133, 6134, 6135  
Fortec Star 6123, 6023  
Fresat 6014  
Funai 6070  
GE 6111  
General Instrument 6032  
GOI 6002, 6004  
Grundig 6007, 6030  
Alba 6005, 6013, 6011  
Allsat 6102  
NEC 6050, 6131  
Netsat 6059  
Sonicview 6055, 6107  
Sony 6062, 6063, 6030, 6143  
Star Choice 6032  
Star Trak 6032  
Alltech 6011  
Next Level 6032  
nfusion 6015  
Amstrad 6033, 6030, 6044  
Anttron 6013  
Nokia 6025, 6026, 6118, 6119, 6121  
Asat 6102  
Austar 6000, 6045  
Pace 6035, 6005, 6030, 6031  
Panarex 6016  
TechniSat 6033  
Thomson 6110, 6111, 6014  
Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115, 6116  
Toshiba 6038, 6054, 6039, 6130  
TPS 6041  
BELL 6160  
Bell ExpressVu 6002, 6003  
British Sky Broadcasting 6030  
Canal 6105  
Chaparral 6034  
CNS 6001  
Coolsat 6021  
Crossdigital 6043  
Digenius 6104  
Digiwave 6053  
DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6111, 6062,  
6063, 6113, 6008, 6038, 6054, 6069,  
6060, 6059, 6043, 6018, 6114, 6115,  
6116, 6093  
Dish Network System 6002, 6089,  
6003, 6004  
Dishpro 6002, 6089, 6004  
DX Antenna 6140  
E Aichi 6141  
Panasonic 6008, 6009, 6030, 6136,  
6137, 6138  
Hirschmann 6033  
Hisense 6020  
Pansat 6016, 6022  
Philips 6002, 6113, 6038, 6054, 6060,  
6059, 6102, 6103, 6030, 6114  
Primestar 6032, 6147  
Proscan 6110, 6111  
Hitachi 6038, 6049, 6132  
Houston 6002  
Triasat 6033  
Ultrasat 6021  
US Digital 6020  
USDTV 6020  
ViewSat 6048  
Voom 6032  
HTS 6002, 6004  
Hughes Network Systems 6113,  
6038, 6054, 6114, 6115, 6116  
Hyundai 6016  
Proton 6020  
RadioShack 6002, 6111, 6032  
Radix 6036  
iLo 6020  
Innova 6059  
Jerrold 6032, 6128, 6149, 6150,  
6151, 6152, 6153, 6154, 6155, 6156,  
6157  
JVC 6002, 6003, 6004  
Kathrein 6096  
Lava 6053  
LG 6047, 6018  
Marantz 6102  
RCA 6002, 6110, 6111, 6113, 6109,  
Zehnder 6101  
6061, 6114, 6142, 6144, 6148  
Zenith 6042, 6069, 6037, 6125, 6127,  
SA 6124, 6126, 6158, 6159  
Saba 6014  
Sagem 6041, 6120  
Samsung 6070, 6113, 6091, 6043,  
6017, 6114, 6093  
Sanyo 6046  
Sat Cruiser 6015  
Schwaiger 6066  
6129  
109  
En  
Additional information  
12  
Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)  
Pioneer 0126, 0128  
Bell ExpressVu 6002, 6003  
DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6062, 6113,  
6060, 6059, 6114, 6115, 6116  
Dish Network System 6002, 6089  
Dishpro 6002, 6089  
Echostar 6002, 6089, 6003  
Expressvu 6002  
JVC 6003  
Sonicview 6055, 6107  
Sony 6062  
Star Choice 6032  
Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115, 6116  
Motorola 6032  
Philips 6113, 6114  
Hughes Network Systems 6113, Proscan 6110  
6114, 6115, 6116  
Samsung 6114  
Cable Set Top Box  
Pioneer 6028, 6029, 6095, 6099  
ABC 6122  
Accuphase 6122  
Amino 6077, 6078  
Auna 6082  
BCC 6072  
Bell & Howell 6122  
Bright House 6074, 6029  
Cable One 6074, 6029  
Cablevision 6074, 6029  
Charter 6074, 6029, 6058  
Cisco 6029, 6028, 6083  
Comcast 6074, 6029, 1982  
Cox 6074, 6029  
Director 6073  
Emerson 6122  
Fosgate 6072  
General Instrument 6073, 6072,  
6122  
Homecast 6024  
i3 Micro 6077  
Insight 6074, 6073, 6029  
Jebsee 6122  
Jerrold 6073, 6072, 6122  
Knology 6029  
Macab 6040  
Mediacom 6074, 6029  
Memorex 6112  
Motorola 6074, 6073, 6072, 6029,  
6122, 6094  
Samsung 6095  
Scientific Atlanta 6029, 6028,  
6027, 6112  
MTS 6094  
Myrio 6077, 6078  
Noos 6040  
Sejin 6077  
Shaw 6074  
Starcom 6122  
Pace 6074, 6029, 6028, 6106, 6083  
Panasonic 6112, 6083  
Paragon 6112  
Stargate 6122  
Suddenlink 6074, 6029  
Supercable 6072  
Penney 6112  
Time Warner 6074, 6029, 6058  
Tivo 6076  
Toshiba 6112  
United Cable 6072, 6122  
US Electronics 6072  
Videoway 6112  
Zenith 6112  
Philips 6012  
Pulsar 6112  
Quasar 6112  
Regal 6072  
Rogers 6029  
Runco 6112  
Digeo 6029, 6058  
Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)  
Pioneer 0127, 6029  
Amino 6078  
Bright House 6074, 6029  
Cable One 6074, 6029  
Cablevision 6074, 6029  
Charter 6074, 6029, 6058  
Cisco 6029, 6083  
Mediacom 6074, 6029  
Motorola 6074, 6081  
Myrio 6078  
Shaw 6074  
Comcast 6074, 6029, 6083, 6076  
Cox 6074, 6029  
Suddenlink 6074, 6029  
Supercable 6072  
Time Warner 6074, 6029, 6058  
Tivo 6076  
Digeo 6081, 6058  
Homecast 6024  
Insight 6074, 6029  
Knology 6029  
Pace 6029  
Panasonic 6083  
Rogers 6029  
Scientific Atlanta 6029  
CD  
Pioneer 5065, 5066  
AKAI 5043  
Asuka 5045  
Denon 5019  
Fisher 5048  
Goldstar 5040  
Hitachi 5042  
Philips 5022, 5032, 5044  
RCA 5013, 5029  
Technics 5041  
Victor 5014  
Yamaha 5024, 5025, 5038, 5046,  
5047  
Kenwood 5020, 5021, 5031  
Luxman 5049  
Roadstar 5052  
Marantz 5033  
Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030, 5050  
Panasonic 5036  
Sharp 5051  
Sony 5012, 5023, 5026, 5027, 5028,  
5039  
TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034, 5035, 5037  
CD-R  
Pioneer 5067  
Philips 5054  
Yamaha 5055  
Laser Disc Player  
Pioneer 5062, 5063  
Cassete Deck  
Pioneer 5058, 5059, 5070  
Digital Tape  
Pioneer 5069  
MD  
Pioneer 5068  
110  
En  
Additional information  
Specifications  
12  
Integrated Control Section  
Control (SR) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . .Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
Control (IR) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
IR signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)  
12 V Trigger terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
12 V Trigger output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V, Total 150 mA  
RS-232C cable type . . . . . . . 9-pin, cross type, female-female  
EXTENSION terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 150 mA  
Amplifier Section  
Continuous average power output of 140 watts* per  
channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
with no more than 0.08 %** total harmonic  
distortion.  
Multi channel simultaneous power output (1 kHz, 1 %, 8 Ω)  
7 ch total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 W  
Continuous Power Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 0.08 %)  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W + 140 W  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W + 140 W  
Surround back (Front height/wide). . . . . . 140 W + 140 W  
Continuous Power Output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 1.0 %)  
Network Section  
LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX  
Miscellaneous  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 W  
In standby . . . . . . . .0.2 W (HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)  
0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON)  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W  
Surround back (Front height/wide). . . . . . 180 W + 180 W  
Total harmonic distortion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 %  
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 130 W, 8 Ω)  
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s  
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers  
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer  
Dimensions . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 200 mm (H) x 460 mm (D)  
(16 9/16 in. (W) x 7 7/8 in. (H) x 18 1/8 in. (D))  
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18.5 kg (40.8 lb)  
Number of Furnished Parts  
MCACC Setup microphone (APM7009). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Remote control unit (AXD7591) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
iPod cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
These operating instructions  
Audio Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 mV/47 kΩ  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 mV/47 kΩ  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB  
Note  
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB  
(Pure Direct Mode)  
Tuner Section  
Cleaning the unit  
Frequency Range (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Antenna Input (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced  
Frequency Range (AM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz  
Antenna (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna (balanced)  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and  
dirt.  
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth  
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six  
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe  
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or  
cleansers.  
Video Section  
Signal level  
Composite Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω),  
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Corresponding maximum resolution  
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1080p (1125p)  
(Video convert off)  
• Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide sprays or  
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will  
corrode the surface.  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced by NEC corporation.  
Digital In/Out Section  
FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation  
HDMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (Not DVI)  
HDMI output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA  
USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)  
iPod terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB, and Video (Composite)  
SIRIUS antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-pin mini DIN cable  
ADAPTER PORT terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA  
111  
En  
Additional information  
12  
112  
En  
Additional information  
12  
113  
En  
Additional information  
12  
114  
En  
Additional information  
12  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
LIMITEDWARRANTY  
WARRANTYVALIDONLYINCOUNTRYOFPRODUCTPURCHASE  
WARRANTY  
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. (PUSA), and Pioneer Electronics Of Canada, Inc. (POC), warrant that products distributed by PUSA in the U.S.A., and by POC in Canada that fail to function  
properlyundernormaluseduetoamanufacturingdefectwheninstalledandoperatedaccordingtotheowner’smanualenclosedwiththeunitwillberepairedorreplacedwithaunitofcomparable  
value, at the option of PUSA or POC, without charge to you for parts or actual repair work. Parts supplied under this warranty may be new or rebuilt at the option of PUSA or POC.  
THISLIMITEDWARRANTYAPPLIESTOTHEORIGINALORANYSUBSEQUENTOWNEROFTHISPIONEERPRODUCTDURINGTHEWARRANTYPERIODPROVIDEDTHE  
PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN AUTHORIZED PIONEER DISTRIBUTOR/DEALER IN THE U.S.A. OR CANADA. YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SALES  
RECEIPT OR OTHER VALID PROOF OF PURCHASE SHOWING THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OR, IF RENTED, YOUR RENTAL CONTRACT SHOWING THE PLACE  
ANDDATEOFFIRSTRENTAL. INTHEEVENTSERVICEISREQUIRED,THEPRODUCTMUSTBEDELIVEREDWITHINTHEWARRANTYPERIOD,TRANSPORTATIONPREPAID,  
ONLY FROM WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE AS EXPLAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. YOU WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THE  
PRODUCT. PUSA OR POC, AS APPROPRIATE, WILL PAY TO RETURN THE REPAIRED OR REPLACEMENT PRODUCT TO YOU WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE.  
Parts  
Labor  
PRODUCTWARRANTYPERIOD  
1 Year  
1 Year  
Home Audio and Video  
.........................................................................................................................................................  
90 Days  
90 Days  
Microphones, Headphones, Phono Cartridges and Styluses ................................................................................................  
Shorter limited warranty periods apply to some models. Please refer to the limited warranty document enclosed with the product for a definitive statement of the warranty period.  
The warranty period for retail customers who rent the product commences upon the date product is first put into use (a) during the rental period or (b) retail sale, whichever occurs first.  
WHAT IS NOT COVERED  
IF THIS PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN UNAUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THIS PRODUCT IS SOLD STRICTLY “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTS".  
PIONEER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL AND/OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.  
PIONEER DOES NOT WARRANT ANY PRODUCT LISTED ABOVE WHEN IT IS USED IN A TRADE OR BUSINESS OR IN ANY INDUSTRIAL OR COMMERCIAL APPLICATION.  
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY IF THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN SUBJECTED TO POWER IN EXCESS OF ITS PUBLISHED POWER RATING.  
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER TELEVISION OR DISPLAY SCREENS DAMAGED BY STATIC, NON-MOVING, IMAGES APPLIED FOR LENGTHY PERIODS (BURN-IN).  
ANY  
THISWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERTHECABINETORANYAPPEARANCEITEM,USERATTACHEDANTENNA,ANYDAMAGETORECORDSORRECORDINGTAPESORDISCS,  
DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT RESULTING FROM ALTERATIONS, MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY PIONEER, ACCIDENT, MISUSE OR ABUSE, DAMAGE DUE TO  
LIGHTNINGORTOPOWERSURGES,SUBSEQUENTDAMAGEFROMLEAKING,DAMAGEFROMINOPERATIVEBATTERIES,ORTHEUSEOFBATTERIESNOTCONFORMINGTOTHOSE  
SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S MANUAL.  
THISWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERTHECOSTOFPARTSORLABORWHICHWOULDBEOTHERWISEPROVIDEDWITHOUTCHARGEUNDERTHISWARRANTYOBTAINEDFROM  
ANYSOURCEOTHERTHANAPIONEERAUTHORIZEDSERVICECOMPANYOROTHERDESIGNATEDLOCATION. THISWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERDEFECTSORDAMAGECAUSED  
BY THE USE OF UNAUTHORIZED PARTS OR LABOR OR FROM IMPROPER MAINTENANCE.  
ALTERED, DEFACED, OR REMOVED SERIAL NUMBERS VOID THIS ENTIRE WARRANTY  
NOOTHERWARRANTIES  
IN THE U.S.A. - PIONEER LIMITS ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSE,TOAPERIODNOTTOEXCEEDTHEWARRANTYPERIOD. NOWARRANTIESSHALLAPPLYAFTERTHE  
WARRANTYPERIOD. SOMESTATESDONOTALLOWLIMITATIONSONHOWLONGANIMPLIEDWARRANTYLASTSANDSOMESTATESDONOTALLOWTHEEXCLUSIONS  
ORLIMITATIONSOFINCIDENTALORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES, SOTHEABOVELIMITATIONSOREXCLUSIONSMAYNOTAPPLYTOYOU. THISWARRANTYGIVES  
YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.  
INCANADA-EXCEPTASEXPRESSLYPROVIDEDHEREIN,THEREARENOREPRESENTATIONS,WARRANTIES,OBLIGATIONSORCONDITIONS,IMPLIED,STATUTORY  
OR OTHERWISE, APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT.  
TO OBTAIN SERVICE  
PUSA and POC have appointed a number of Authorized Service Companies throughout the U.S.A. and Canada should your product require service. To receive warranty service  
you need to present your sales receipt or, if rented, your rental contract showing place and date of original owner’s transaction. If shipping the unit you will need to package  
it carefully and send it, transportation prepaid by a traceable, insured method, to an Authorized Service Company. Package the product using adequate padding material to  
prevent damage in transit. The original container is ideal for this purpose. Include your name, address and telephone number where you can be reached during business hours.  
On all complaints and concerns in the U.S.A. call Customer Support at 1-800-421-1404, or, in Canada, call Customer Satisfaction at 1-877-283-5901.  
INCANADA  
For additional information on this warranty,  
please call or write:  
INTHEU.S.A.  
For hook-up and operation of your unit or to locate an  
Authorized Service Company, please call or write:  
CUSTOMERSATISFACTIONGROUP  
PIONEERELECTRONICSOFCANADA,INC.  
300 ALLSTATE PARKWAY  
MARKHAM, ON L3R 0P2  
PIONEERELECTRONICSSERVICE,INC.  
P.O. BOX 1760  
LONG BEACH, CALIFORNIA 90801  
1-800-421-1404  
(905) 479-4411  
1-877-283-5901  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
DISPUTERESOLUTION  
IN THE U.S.A. - Following our response to any initial request to Customer Support, should a dispute arise between you and Pioneer, Pioneer makes available its Complaint  
Resolution Program to resolve the dispute. The Complaint Resolution Program is available to you without charge. You are required to use the Complaint Resolution Program  
before you exercise any rights under, or seek any remedies, created by Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty-Federal Trade Commission Improvement Act, 15 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.  
To use the Complaint Resolution Program call 1-800-421-1404 and explain to the customer service representative the problem you are experiencing, steps you have taken  
to have the product repaired during the warranty period and the name of the authorized Distributor/Dealer from whom the Pioneer product was purchased. After the complaint  
has been explained to the representative, a resolution number will be issued. Within 40 days of receiving your complaint, Pioneer will investigate the dispute and will either:  
(1) respond to your complaint in writing informing you what action Pioneer will take, and in what time period, to resolve the dispute; or (2) respond to your complaint in writing  
informing you why it will not take any action.  
IN CANADA - Call the Customer Satisfaction Manager at (905) 946-7446 to discuss your complaint and to obtain a prompt resolution.  
RECORDTHEPLACEANDDATEOFPURCHASEFORFUTUREREFERENCE  
ModelNo. ____________________________________________ SerialNo. _________________________________________ PurchaseDate _______________________  
PurchasedFrom _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
KEEP THIS INFORMATION AND YOUR SALES RECEIPT IN A SAFE PLACE  
115  
En  
To register your product, find the nearest authorized service location, to  
purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, or accessories,  
please go to one of following URLs :  
Pour enregistrer votre produit, trouver le service après-vente agréé le plus  
proche et pour acheter des pièces de rechange, des modes d’emploi ou  
des accessoires, reportez-vous aux URL suivantes :  
In the USA/Aux Etats-Unis  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
In Canada/Aux Canada  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca  
S018_B1_EnFr  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_B1_En  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2010 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<ARB7447-B>  
Printed in  

RCA EZ3000PL User Manual
Pelco Camera Lens 13ZV55X30(P) (CE) User Manual
Orion Car Audio XTR Power Amplifier XTR5001 User Manual
Olympus Magellan 8 x 25 WP I User Manual
Lanzar Car Audio OPTIDRIVE OPTIMC90 User Manual
Laney Amplification Car Amplifier LC50 II User Manual
Kenwood KAC M845 User Manual
Kenwood Excelon DDX7015 User Manual (2)
KATA KT A02I User Manual
JVC KD G498 User Manual